Home
        Your HTC Desire User guide
         Contents
1.                                                                                                                  9    Messages  94    About   Messages                                                                                                                   9    Sending   text   and   multimedia   messages                                                        9    New   message   notifications                                                                                             99  WAP   push   messages                                                                                                        100  Managing   message   conversations                                                                              101    Protecting   a   message   from   deletion                                                              10  Deleting   a   message   thread                                                                                 10  Deleting   several   message   threads                                                                10  Deleting   a   single   message                                                                                  10  Viewing   contact   details   and   communicating   with   a   contact            10    Setting   text   and   multimedia   message   options                                                    10  Adding   the   Messages   widget                                                                          
2.                                                                                      Searching   for   a   location                                                                                        Getting   directions                                                                                                   6    18       Finding   your   friends   with   Google   Latitude    available        by   country                                                                                                                 8    Using   HTC   Footprints                                                                                                          Creating   a   footprint                                                                                                 Revisiting   a   footprint                                                                                              Editing   or   deleting   a   footprint                                                                           Exporting   your   footprints                                                                                     Importing   footprints                                                                                                Adding   the   Footprints   widget                                                                             More apps  256    Watching   videos   on   YouTube                                                                                    
3.                                                                              70  Clearing   the   call   history   list                                                                                   71    Call   services                                                                                                                           71  Turning   Airplane   mode   on   or   off                                                                                    7    People  74    About   People                                                                                                                         7  Ways   of   getting   contacts   into   your   phone                                                              7  People   screen                                                                                                                         7    Setting   up   My   contact   card                                                                                  76    10       Your   contacts   list                                                                                                       76  Adding   a   new   contact                                                                                             78  Importing   contacts   from   an   Exchange   ActiveSync   account               78  Merging   contact   information                                                                               79  Editing   a   contact   s   
4.                                                                            7    Setting   Web   and   Quick   Search   Box   options                                                7  Searching   the   Web   and   your   phone   using   the   Quick   Search   Box   8    Personalizing  49    Making   your   phone   truly   yours                                                                                      9  Changing   the   ringtone                                                                                                       9  Personalizing   your   phone   with   scenes                                                                      0    Using   a   preset   scene                                                                                                0  Customizing   and   saving   a   scene                                                                         1  Renaming   or   deleting   a   scene                                                                                 Changing   your   wallpaper                                                                                                   Personalizing   your   Home   screen   with   widgets                                                         Adding   a   widget   to   your   Home   screen                                                            Downloading   HTC   widgets                                                                                      Adding   application 
5.                                                                      Playing   music                                                                                                                        Browsing   music   in   the   Library                                                                                      Creating   a   playlist                                                                                                              6    Playing   the   songs   in   a   playlist                                                                          6  Managing   playlists                                                                                                  6    Setting   a   song   as   ringtone                                                                                            8    Checking   if   the   song   was   added   as   a   ringtone                                       8    Sending   music   using   Bluetooth                                                                                 9  About   the   Music   widget                                                                                                9    Maps and location  240    Using   Google   Maps                                                                                                          0    Viewing   locations                                                                                                   0  Viewing   map   layers          
6.                                                                  86    Adding   the   People   widget                                                                                    86  Setting   the   default   communication   method                                                86  Changing   the   default   communication   method                                           86  Getting   in   touch   with   a   contact                                                                         87    Keyboard  88    Using   the   onscreen   keyboard                                                                                        88    Using   the   landscape   onscreen   keyboard                                                       88  Changing   the   onscreen   keyboard   layout                                                       89  Entering   text                                                                                                                89  Entering   words   with   predictive   text                                                                90  Entering   text   with   voice   input                                                                              91    Adjusting   touch   input   settings                                                                                       91        11    Touch   Input   settings                                                                                               91  Text   input      
7.                                                               80    Checking   the   power   usage   of   applications                                                 81    Managing   memory                                                                                                              81    Checking   how   much   phone   memory   is   available   for   use                     81  Checking   the   available   storage   card   space                                                 81  Clearing   application   cache   and   data                                                            8  Uninstalling   third party   applications                                                             8    0       Freeing   up   more   phone   memory   or   storage   card   space                    8    Checking   information   about   your   phone                                                              8    Update and reset  284    Updating   your   phone   s   system   software                                                               8    Checking   for   phone   system   software   updates   manually                    8    Performing   a   hard factory   reset                                                                                8    Specifications  287    Index  289    Basics    Inside the box    You   will   find   the   following   inside   the   box     Phone    USB   cable    AC   adapter     mm   stereo   headset    Battery    microSD   card    Qui
8.                                                          1    Camera   settings                                                                                                                  16    Changing   basic   settings                                                                                       16  Changing   advanced   settings                                                                              17    Photos  221    About   the   Photos   application                                                                                       1  Selecting   an   album                                                                                                             1  Viewing   photos   and   videos                                                                                              Browsing   in   filmstrip   or   grid   view                                                                     Viewing   a   photo   in   landscape   orientation                                                 Zooming   in   or   out   on   a   photo                                                                            Watching   video                                                                                                            Viewing   photos   in   your   social   networks                                                                6    Viewing   photos   on   Facebook                                                                      
9.                                                        17  Using World Clock                                                                                                     174    Setting   your   home   city                                                                                          17  Setting the time zone  date  and time                                                     175  Adding   a   city   to   the   World   Clock   screen                                                   176    Setting   the   alarm   clock                                                                                                    176    Setting   an   alarm                                                                                                        177  Deleting   an   alarm                                                                                                     177  Changing   alarm   sound   settings                                                                         178    Checking   weather                                                                                                               179    Adding   a   city   to   the   Weather   screen                                                             180  Changing   the   order   of   cities   on   the   Weather   screen                            181  Deleting   cities   from   the   Weather   screen                                                       181  Changing   weather   opt
10.                                                 0  Checking   notifications                                                                                           1    Using   the   optical   trackball   to   interact   with   the   touch   screen                            Going   to   an   extended   Home   screen                                                                    8       Selecting   an   item   onscreen                                                                                    Selecting   a   tab                                                                                                             Moving   the   cursor   when   entering   text                                                             Selecting   a   link   on   a   webpage                                                                               Adjusting   the   volume                                                                                                            Adjusting   the   ringer   volume                                                                               Adjusting   the   media   volume                                                                                   Connecting   your   phone   to   a   computer                                                                      Copying   files   to   and   from   the   storage   card                                                            6  Searching   your   phone   and   the   Web
11.                                               9  Finger   gestures                                                                                                            1    Getting   started                                                                                                                          Turning   on   your   phone                                                                                           Turning   off   your   phone                                                                                             Setting   up   your   phone   for   the   first   time                                                          Sleep   mode                                                                                                                       Home   screen                                                                                                                           7    Extended   Home   screen                                                                                          7  Navigating   the   Home   screen                                                                               8    Phone   status   and   notifications                                                                                      9    Phone   status   icons                                                                                                    9  Notification   icons                                                      
12.                                         17    Friend   Stream   screen                                                                                             17  Updating   your   status                                                                                              18  Adding   the   Friend   Stream   widget                                                                   18    Chatting   in   Google   Talk                                                                                                   19    Signing   in   to   Google   Talk                                                                                     19  Chatting   with   friends                                                                                             19  Changing   your   online   status   and   picture                                                       11  Managing   your   Friends   list                                                                                   1  Changing   Google   Talk   settings                                                                         1    Email  136    Using   Gmail Google   Mail                                                                                                  16    Viewing   your   Gmail Google   Mail   inbox                                                        16  Reading   your   messages                                                                                       18  Sending   a   mes
13.                               19  Switching   between   browser   windows                                                          19  Finding   text   within   a   web   page                                                                        19  Downloading   applications   from   the   web                                                     19  Copying   text    looking   up   information    and   sharing                                19  Viewing   bookmarks   and   previously   visited   pages                                   197  Setting   browser   options                                                                                       199    Using   your   phone   as   a   modem    tethering                                                           00    Bluetooth  201    Using   Bluetooth                                                                                                                  01    Turning   Bluetooth   on   or   off                                                                                01  Changing   the   phone   name                                                                                0    Connecting   a   Bluetooth   headset   or   car   kit                                                          0    Reconnecting   a   headset   or   car   kit                                                                 0    16       Disconnecting   or   unpairing   from   a   Bluetooth   device                              
14.               71  Getting   help                                                                                                                 71    Security  272    Protecting   your   phone   with   a   screen   lock                                                             7    Settings  274    Settings   on   your   phone                                                                                                   7  Changing   display   settings                                                                                              77    Adjusting   the   screen   brightness   manually                                                  77  Adjusting   the   time   before   the   screen   turns   off                                        77  Preventing   automatic   screen   rotation                                                           77  Recalibrating   the   G sensor                                                                                 78  Switching   animation   effects   on   or   off                                                           78  Keeping   the   screen   on   while   charging   the   phone                                   78    Changing   sound   settings                                                                                               79  Changing   the   phone   language                                                                                   80  Optimizing   your   phone   s   battery   life         
15.              107    Accounts and sync  108    Synchronizing   with   online   accounts                                                                         108    Adding   a   social   network   account                                                                    108  Synchronizing   with   a   Google   Account                                                         109  Synchronizing   with   a   Microsoft   Exchange   ActiveSync   account       110  Managing   your   accounts                                                                                       110    Using   HTC   Sync                                                                                                                     11    Installing   HTC   Sync                                                                                                   11  Setting   up   HTC   Sync   to   recognize   your   phone                                         11  Setting   up   synchronization                                                                                   11  Setting   up   more   sync   options                                                                             116  Synchronizing   your   phone                                                                                    117  Downloading   the   latest   HTC   Sync   upgrade                                                 118  Installing   apps   from   your   computer   to   your   phone                             
16.        0    Disconnecting   a   Bluetooth   device                                                                 0  Unpairing   from   a   Bluetooth   device                                                             0    Sending   and   receiving   information   using   Bluetooth                                       0    Sending   information   from   your   phone   to   another   device                  0  Receiving   information   from   another   device                                              07    Camera  209    Camera   basics                                                                                                                     09    Viewfinder   screen                                                                                                   09  Using   the   optical   trackball   as   the   shutter   release                                     11  Review   screen                                                                                                             11    Zooming                                                                                                                                   1  Taking   a   photo                                                                                                                      1    Face   detection                                                                                                           1  Capturing   a   video                                            
17.        and   then   on   the   Share   options   menu    tap   Picasa     Select   the   pictures   you   want   to   share   and   then   tap   Next        Select   the   online   album   where   you   want   to   upload   the   pictures      or   tap        to   create   a   new   album     Tap   Upload    You   can   view   the   photos   online   at   http   picasaweb   google com     Sharing videos on YouTube  You   can   share   your   videos   by   uploading   them   to   YouTube       Before     you   do   this    you   must   create   a   YouTube   account   and   sign   in   to   that     account   on   your   phone     1     2     3     4     5     1     2     3     4     5     6         Photos    Press   HOME            tap         and   then   tap   Photos     Tap   the   album   where   the   videos   you   want   to   share   are   in     Tap        and   then   on   the   Share   options   menu    tap   YouTube     Select   the   videos   you   want   to   share   and   then   tap   Next        Enter   the   prompted   information    such   as   description   and   tags      and   select   a   privacy   option     Tap   Upload     1     2     3     4     5     6     Music    About the Music application    Enjoy   listening   to   songs   and   music   on   your   phone   using   the   Music     application    You   need   to   copy   music   files   to   your   storage   card   first   to     use   the   Music   application   to   play   music    To   find   o
18.       16  Creating   a   calendar   event                                                                                               17    Inviting   guests   to   your   event    Google   Account   only                            18  Sending   a   meeting   request   using   Calendar    Exchange   ActiveSync     only                                                                                                                                19    Changing   calendar   views                                                                                               19    Month   view                                                                                                                 160  Day   and   Agenda   views                                                                                           161  Week   view                                                                                                                   16    Viewing    editing   or   deleting   an   event                                                                       16    Viewing   and   editing   an   event                                                                            16  Deleting   an   event                                                                                                     16    Calendar   event   reminders                                                                                              16    Viewing    dismissing    or   snoozi
19.       gt    Internet     Press   MENU    and   then   tap   Bookmarks     On   the   History   tab            navigate   to   the   page   you   want   to   view       and   then   tap   the   page     Clearing the list of previously visited pages    Press   HOME          and then tap      and   then   tap      gt    Internet     Press   MENU    and   then   tap   Bookmarks     On   the   History   tab            press   MENU    and   then   tap   Clear history     1     2     1     2     3     1     2     3     4     5     1     2     3     1     2     3     Internet    199    Viewing a page that you often visit    Press   HOME          and then tap      and   then   tap      gt    Internet     Press   MENU    and   then   tap   Bookmarks     On   the   Most   Visited   tab            navigate   to   the   page   you   want   to       view    and   then   tap   the   page     Clearing the list of most visited pages    Press   HOME          and then tap      and   then   tap      gt    Internet     Press   MENU    and   then   tap   Bookmarks     On   the   Most   Visited   tab            press   MENU    and   then   tap   Clear all     Changing the view of bookmarks or most visited pages    Press   HOME          and then tap      and   then   tap      gt    Internet     Press   MENU    and   then   tap   Bookmarks     On   the   Bookmarks   tab           or   the   Most   visited   tab            press       MENU    and   then   tap   Thumbnails    List    or   Grid   to   c
20.      1     2     3     4     5     11    Accounts   and   sync    On   your   PC    follow   the   instructions   to   finish   the   wizard   on   the     HTC   Sync   screen     Setting up HTC Sync to recognize your phone  After   installing    set   up   HTC   Sync   to   recognize   your   phone     Connect   your   phone   to   the   computer   with   the   supplied   USB   cable      Or    if   your   phone   is   already   connected    press   and   hold   the   status     bar   and   drag   your   finger   down   to   open   the   Notifications   panel      Then   tap   the   status   that   shows      Select   to   change   USB   connection     type        On   the   Connect   to   PC   screen   in   your   phone     tap   HTC Sync   and     then   tap   Done     Your   phone   attempts   to   find   HTC   Sync   on   your   computer    Wait     for   a   few   seconds   for   the   process   to   finish     If   your   phone   displays   a   message   indicating   that   it   s   unable   to   find     HTC   Sync    try   disconnecting   and   reconnecting   the   USB   cable    and     then   repeat   step        When   your   phone   finds   HTC   Sync    your   computer   will   display   the     Phone   Connection   Wizard    Click   Next     Enter   the   name   you   want   for   your   phone    and   then   click   Finish     Check   the   HTC   Sync   icon   at   the   bottom right   side   of   your     computer   screen    If   it   appears   green   in   
21.      6  Viewing   photos   on   Flickr                                                                                    6        17    Working   with   photos                                                                                                        7    Rotating   and   saving   a   photo                                                                             7  Cropping   a   photo                                                                                                    7    Sharing                                                                                                                                 8    Sending   photos   or   videos   by   email                                                               9  Sending   a   photo   or   video   by   MMS                                                              9  Sending   photos   or   videos   using   Bluetooth                                               0  Sharing   photos   on   Facebook                                                                           0  Sharing   photos   on   Flickr                                                                                       1  Sharing   photos   on   Picasa                                                                                     1  Sharing   videos   on   YouTube                                                                                 1    Music  233    About   the   Music   application                     
22.      Changing Google Talk settings    Setting notifications for new Google Talk messages  You   can   set   the   phone   to   play   a   sound    vibrate    or   display   a     notification   icon   in   the   status   bar   each   time   you   receive   a   new   instant     message     Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  Talk        In   the   Friends   list    press   MENU   and   then   tap   More  gt  Settings     Select   the   IM notifications   check   box   to   receive   a   notification                     in   the   status   bar   when   a   new   instant   message   arrives     Do   one   of   the   following     Tap   Select ringtone   to   select   the   ringtone   to   use   when   a     new   instant   message   arrives    The   ringtone   briefly   plays   when     selected    If   you   don   t   want   a   ringtone   to   play   when   you   receive     a   new   Google   Talk   message    select   Silent     1     2     3     1     2     3     4            Social    1    Select   the   Vibrate   check   box   to   vibrate   your   phone   when   you     receive   a   new   Google   Talk   message        Showing or hiding the mobile indicator to friends  You   can   check   what   type   of   device   your   friend   is   using   to   chat   in     Google   Talk    In   the   friends   list    check   the   image   that   appears   to   the     right   of   your   friend   s   name        Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  Ta
23.      Press   HOME         gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings    gt    Wireless  amp     networks    gt    Bluetooth settings     In   the   Bluetooth   devices   section    press   and   hold   the   device   to     unpair     Tap   Disconnect  amp  unpair     Sending and receiving information using Bluetooth    You   can   use   Bluetooth   to   transfer   information   between   your   phone     and   another   Bluetooth enabled   device   such   as   a   phone   or   notebook     computer    The   first   time   you   transfer   information   between   your   phone     and   another   device    you   need   to   enter   or   confirm   a   security   passcode      After   that    your   phone   and   the   other   device   are   paired    and   you   will     not   need   to   exchange   passcodes   to   transfer   information   in   the   future     1     2     3     1     2     3     Bluetooth    0    Sending information from your phone to another device  You   can   send   the   following   types   of   information    depending   on   the     device   you   are   sending   to     Images   and   videos       Calendar   events       Contacts    Audio   files    only   unprotected   files   can   be   sent     Set   the   receiving   device   to   discoverable   mode    You   may   also     need   to   set   it   to      Receive   Beams      or      Receive   Files       Refer   to   the     device   s   documentation   for   instructions   on   receiving   informati
24.      gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings  gt  Sound  amp     display  gt  Sound profile     On   the   Choose   a   Profile   options   menu    tap   the   sound   profile   you     want   to   use        Enabling or disabling audible selection  You   can   choose   to   play   a   sound   when   you   are   selecting   items   onscreen     Press   HOME            gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings  gt  Sound  amp  display     Scroll   down   the   screen    and   then   select   or   clear   the   Audible  selection check   box     Enabling or disabling haptic feedback  When   haptic   feedback   is   enabled    default     your   wireless   device     vibrates   every   time   you   press   the   soft   keys   on   the   front   panel    or   tap     onscreen   buttons   and   other   onscreen   elements     Press   HOME            gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings  gt  Sound  amp  display     Scroll   down   the   screen    and   then   select   or   clear   the   Haptic  feedback   check   box     Choosing the notification sound  You   can   select   the   sound   to   play   when   your   phone   receives   new     notifications     Press   HOME            gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings  gt  Sound  amp     display  gt  Notification sound     Select   your   preferred   notification   sound   in   the   list    and   then   tap     OK     1     2     1     2     1     2     1     2     80    Settings    Changing the phone language    When  
25.      most   often        The   People   screen   has   the   following   tabs     1    1  All tab    Gives   you   access   to   all   contacts   on   your   phone    including   Google     contacts    Exchange   ActiveSync   contacts    Phone   contacts    and   Facebook     contacts    You   can   also   use   this   tab   to   open   or   update   My   contact   card      For   more   information    see      Setting   up   My   Contact   Card      in   this   chapter     2  Groups tab    Lets   you   assign   contacts   to   groups   so   you   can   easily   send   an   SMS    MMS      or   email   message   to   a   whole   group    For   more   information    see      Contact     groups      in   this   chapter     3  Online directories tab    Search   for   contacts   on   your   online   directories   such   as   your   Exchange     ActiveSync   or   Facebook   account   to   copy   to   your   phone     4  Call history tab    Lists   all   your   dialed   numbers   and   received   and   missed   calls    See      Using     Call   History      in   the   Phone   calls   chapter            76    People    Setting up My contact card  My contact card   provides   a   convenient   way   to   store   your   personal     contact   information   so   that   you   can   easily   send   it   via   SMS    MMS    email      or   Bluetooth     Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  People     On   the   All   tab   of   the   People   screen    tap   Me    and   then 
26.      number    tap   Call        Tap   the   phone   number   or   contact   from   the   list     1     2     3     4                   Phone   calls    61    To   call   a   different   phone   number   associated   with   the   contact      tap        at   the   right   side   of   the   contact   name    On   the   contact       details   screen    tap   the   number   you   want   to   call     Smart Dial  The   phone   dialer   s   Smart   Dial   feature   makes   it   quick   and   easy   for   you     to   place   a   call    Simply   enter   the   phone   number   or   first   few   letters   of     the   person   you   want   to   call    Smart   Dial   automatically   searches   and     filters   your   contacts   list   stored   on   your   phone    and   the   phone   numbers     from   the   call   history     Calling a speed dial number    Press   HOME            and   then   tap          On   the   phone   keypad    press   and   hold   the   number   that   is     associated   with   the   contact   you   want   to   call        The   number   1   on   the   phone   keypad   is   generally   reserved   for     your   voicemail    Press   and   hold   this   button   to   call   voicemail   and     retrieve   your   voicemail   messages     Adding a contact to speed dial    Press   HOME            and   then   tap          Press   MENU    and   then   tap   Speed dial  gt  Add new     Enter   the   name   of   the   contact   you   want   to   add    When   th
27.      select   a   check   box    the   Archive    Labels    and   Delete   buttons   are     displayed   at   the   bottom   of   the   screen     Tap   the   Archive    Labels    or   Delete   button   to   perform   one   of   those     actions   on   the   batch   of   conversations    or   press   MENU   for   more     options     4     1     2     16    Email    Changing Gmail Google Mail settings    Press   HOME           and   then   tap         gt    Gmail Google Mail     In   the   Inbox    press   MENU   and   then   tap   Settings     Set   the   following   options        Signature    Tap   to   enter   a   signature   that   is   appended   at   the     end   of   your   emails        Confirm delete    Select   the   check   box   to   show   a   confirmation     box   when   you   delete   a   conversation     Batch operations    When   selected    this   adds   a   check   box   to     the   left   of   each   conversation   so   you   can   add   it   to   a   batch    See        Working   with   conversations   in   batches      above        Clear search history    Remove   the   searches   you   have     performed     Labels    Tap   to   select   how   many   days   and   which   Gmail Google     Mail   labels   to   synchronize     Email notifications    Select   the   check   box   to   show   a   notification     icon   on   the   status   bar   when   you   receive   a   new   email     Tap   Select ringtone   if   you   want   your   phone   to   play 
28.     1     2     3     4     5         Basics    Choose   the   phone   language   you   want   to   use    and   then   tap   Next     Your   phone   walks   you   through   a   tutorial   on   how   to   use   the     onscreen   keyboard    Follow   through   the   tutorial   to   learn   how     to   use   the   onscreen   keyboard    Tap   Skip   to   not   go   through   the     tutorial     On   the   Internet   connection   screen    select   how   you   want   to     connect   to   the   Internet    and   then   tap   Next     If   there   are   Wi Fi   networks   in   range    you   will   be   asked   if   you   want     to   connect   to   a   Wi Fi   network    Tap   Next   and   then   tap   the   wireless     network   that   you   want    or   clear   the   Connect to Wi Fi network     checkbox    and   then   tap   Next   to   set   up   your   Wi Fi   connection   at   a     later   time     Some   phone   features   such   as   Weather   and   Footprints   require     Google   s   location   service   to   automatically   determine   your   current     location    On   the   Location   consent   screen    you   can   choose     whether   to   allow   Google   s   location   service   to   collect   information     about   your   location    Clear   or   select   the   checkbox    and   then   tap     Next        This   service   may   incur   additional   data   transfer   fees   from   your     provider    You   can   enable   or   disable   this   service  
29.     118    1       Social  120    Facebook   for   HTC   Sense   and   Facebook   for   Android   application             10    Facebook   for   HTC   Sense                                                                                     10  Facebook   for   Android   application                                                                    11  Differences   between   Facebook   for   HTC   Sense   and   Facebook   for     Android   application                                                                                                 1    Twittering   on   your   phone                                                                                                1    Peep   screen                                                                                                                 1  Sending   a   tweet                                                                                                       1  Searching   for   Twitter   users   to   follow                                                             1  Sending   a   direct   message                                                                                    1  Setting   Peep   options                                                                                             16  Adding   the   Twitter   widget                                                                                  16    Using   Friend   Stream                                                                  
30.     76   MB    Dimensions  LxWxT    7   x    6   x   0 7   inches    119   x   60   x   11 9   mm     Weight   76   ounces    1   grams    with   battery    Display   7 inch   touch sensitive   screen   with   80   X   800   WVGA     resolution    Network  Dual band    800   and   1900   MHz   CDMA000   1xRTT 1xEVDO 1xEVDO   rev    A   and   IS   9A B   voice   or   data   with   up   to   1 8   Mbps   uplink   and      1   Mbps   downlink   speeds     Band   frequency   and   data   speed   are   operator     dependent                  Onscreen navigation  Optical   trackball    GPS  Internal   GPS   antenna    Sensors  G Sensor  Digital   compass  Proximity   sensor  Ambient   light   sensor    88    Specifications    Connectivity  Bluetooth      1   with   FTP OPP   for   file   transfer      ADP   for   wireless   stereo   headsets    and   PBAP   for     phonebook   access   from   the   car   kit  Wi Fi      IEEE   80 11   b g n      mm   stereo   audio   jack  micro USB     pin   micro USB    0                             Camera     megapixel   color   camera   with   auto   focus   and   flash    Audio supported  formats    Playback     aac     amr     ogg     ma     mid     mp     wav       wma  Recording     amr                  Video supported  formats    Playback     gp     g     mp     wmv  Recording     gp                Battery  Rechargeable   Lithium ion   battery  Capacity    100   mAh  Talk   time     Up   to   00   minutes  Standby   time     Up   to      h
31.     For   more   information   about   using   the   Mail     application    see   the   Email   chapter     You   can   also   choose   to   send   the   vCalendar   in   a   multimedia   message      For   more   information   about   sending   a   multimedia   message    see   the     Messages   chapter     About the Calendar widget    There   s   a   Calendar   widget   available   that   you   can   add   to   your   Home     screen    and   it   comes   in   different   calendar   views    Tapping   a   day   or     event   on   the   widget   brings   you   to   the   Calendar   application     To   find   out   how   you   can   add   a   widget    see      Personalizing   your   Home     screen   with   widgets      in   the   Personalizing   chapter     Clock and Weather    About the HTC Clock widget    The   HTC   Clock   widget   that   s   by   default   added   on   the   Home   screen     shows   your   current   date    time    and   location    You   can   tap   the   weather     image   on   this   widget   to   open   the   Weather   application   and   check   for     more   weather   forecasts    See      Checking   weather      for   details     The   HTC   Clock   widget   comes   in   a   variety   of   looks   and   designs    You     can   add   another   clock   widget   to   the   extended   Home   screen    if   you     want   to   have   another   clock   that   shows   the   time   of   another   city    To   find     out   how   you   can   add
32.     PC    and or   with   an   Exchange   Server    any   contacts   stored   in   those     accounts   are   displayed   in   People    You   can   also   synchronize   contacts   from     your   Facebook   account   in   People    For   more   information   on   synchronizing     accounts    see      Ways   of   getting   contacts   into   your   phone      in   this   chapter     Ways of getting contacts into your phone    You   can   add   contacts   to   your   phone   from     Gmail Google Mail contacts   Gmail Google   Mail   contacts   are     imported   to   your   phone   after   you   set   up   a   Google   Account    For     details    see   the      Gmail Google   Mail      in   the   Email   chapter     Phone contacts   See      Adding   a   new   contact      in   this   chapter   for     details     Exchange ActiveSync Server   See      Synchronizing   with   a   Microsoft     Exchange   ActiveSync   account      in   the   Accounts   and   sync   chapter     for   details     Contacts on your computer   See      Using   HTC   Sync      in   the     Accounts   and   sync   chapter   for   details                                 People    7    Facebook   See      Adding   an   account      in   the   Accounts   and   sync     chapter   for   details        People screen    The   People   screen   gives   you   easy   access   to   all   your   contacts    as   well     as   even   faster   access   to   the   people   and   groups   of   people   you   contact
33.     SMS settings    Delivery reports    Select   this   option   to   receive   a   report   on   the   delivery   status   of   your     message        1     2     3     4     Messages    10    Priority setting    Set   the   message   priority   of   SMS   messages   sent       Send callback number    Enable   your   phone   to   include   a   number   with   the   text   message   to     allow   the   recipient   to   call   you   back   by   pressing   the   SEND   button        Callback number    Set   the   callback   number     MMS settings    Delivery reports    Select   this   option   to   receive   a   report   on   the   delivery   status   of   your     message        Auto retrieve    Select   this   option   to   automatically   retrieve   all   your   MMS   messages     completely    When   selected    the   MMS   message   header   plus   the     message   body   and   attachments   will   automatically   download   to   your     phone    If   you   clear   this   check   box    only   the   MMS   message   header   will     be   retrieved   and   shown   in   your   All   messages   screen     Priority setting    Set   the   message   priority   of   MMS   messages   sent     Maximum message size    Set   the   maximum   file   size   of   an   MMS   message    The   MMS   message   will     not   be   sent   out   if   it   exceeds   the   file   size   set   here        106    Messages    Received messages    Received notification    Select   this   option 
34.     There   are   6      additional        screens   apart   from   the   main   Home   screen     You   cannot   add   more   screens     8    Basics    Navigating the Home screen  You   can   go   to   the   extended   Home   screen   by   sliding   your   finger     horizontally   across   the   screen   to   go   to   the   left   or   right   side   of   the     Home   screen    While   on   an   extended   Home   screen    press   HOME           to       return   to   the   main   Home   screen        Directly going to a particular screen using Leap view    1  On   any   Home   screen    pinch   the   screen   to   show   the   Leap   view       that   shows   the   screens   as   thumbnails        On   the   main   Home   screen    you   can   press   HOME           to   show   the       Leap   view        2     Tap   the   screen   you   want   to   open        Basics    9    Phone status and notifications    Phone status icons  These   are   the   icons   that   may   appear   on   the   phone   status   area   of   the     status   bar     G   data   transfer     Roaming    G   connected  No   signal    G   in   idle   mode  Vibrate   mode    1xRTT   data   transfer  Location   setting   on    1xRTT   connected  Location   setting   off    1xRTT   in   idle   mode  Phone   speaker   is   mute    Connected   to   a   Wi Fi   network  Phone   microphone   is   mute    Bluetooth   is   on  Battery   is   very   low    10    remaining     Connected   to   a   Bluetooth 
35.     To   access   Android   Market    you   must   first   connect   to   the   Internet   using     your   phone   s   Wi Fi   or   data   connection   and   sign   in   to   your   Google     Account     1      1     Tap   to   search   Android   Market   for   apps   to   install   on   your   phone             Tap   to   display   the   available   apps   or   games   on   Android   Market    or   display     the   apps   that   you   have   already   downloaded   and   installed   from   Android     Market          Featured   apps   list    Tap   an   app   to   read   a   description   about   the   app   and     user   reviews        68    More   apps    Paid   apps   are   currently   only   available   in   certain   countries     Finding and installing an application  When   you   install   apps   from   Android   Market   and   use   them   on   your     phone    they   may   require   access   to   your   personal   information    such   as     your   location    contact   data    and   more    or   access   to   certain   functions     or   settings   of   your   phone    Download   and   install   only   apps   that   you     trust     Press   HOME            and   then   tap   Market   or   tap      gt  Market     When   you   open   Android   Market   for   the   first   time    the   Terms   of     Service   window   will   appear    Tap   Accept   to   continue     To   find   an   app   in   Android   Market    you   can     Browse   through   featured   ap
36.     a   location     stored   in   Footprints    or   a   location   you   pick   on   a   map    For   more     information   about   GPS    maps    and   Footprints    see   the   Maps     and   location   chapter        Contact  vCard     Select   a   contact   from   your   phone    and   then     select   which   contact   information   you   want   to   attach     Appointment  vCalendar     Select   the   calendar   event   you   want     to   attach            4     5     6                                               98    Messages    Slideshow    Opens   the   Edit   slideshow   screen    Tap   Add slide   to     create   a   new   slide    Tap   the   created   slide    for   example    Slide   1       tap   Insert picture    and   then   select   the   picture   you   want   to   add     to   the   slide    You   can   also   navigate   to   the   text   box   and   enter   a     caption   for   the   picture    When   finished    tap   Done   to   attach   the     slideshow   to   your   message     When   editing   multiple   slides    tap        to   edit   the   next   slide   or   tap          to   return   to   the   previous   slide     While   editing   the   slideshow    press   MENU   to   let   you   preview   the     slideshow    add   music   or   video   to   a   slide    remove   a   slide    and   more                   7     When   you   have   finished   composing   the   multimedia   message    tap       Send        To   receive   delivery   rep
37.     and   then   tap     Send     Enter   the   recipient   s   number   or   email   address    and   then   tap   Send     You   cannot   send   a   vCard   using   SMS     You   can   also   send   your   contact   vCard   via   Bluetooth    To   learn   how   to     send   files   through   Bluetooth    see   the   Bluetooth   chapter        Contact groups    On   the   Groups   tab    you   can   assign   contacts   to   groups   so   you   can     easily   send   an   SMS    MMS    or   email   message   to   a   whole   group    You     can   also   sync   groups   on   your   phone   with   the   groups   in   your   Google     account    accessible   via   your   computer   s   web   browser     Creating a group and adding contacts    Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  People     On   the   Groups   tab    at   the   top   of   the   screen    tap   Add group     Enter   a   name   for   the   group    and   then   tap   Add contact to group     Select   the   contacts   you   want   to   add   to   the   group    and   then   tap     Save     1     2     3     4     5     1     2     3     4     People    8    If   your   contacts   list   is   long    you   can   use   the   search   bar   to   search   for       contacts   quickly    or   tap        to   hide   the   onscreen   keyboard   and   scroll       through   the   list     Tap        to   add   a   group   from   photo     Tap   Save     Deleting a group    Press   HOME            and   the
38.     and   then   tap   Delete     Select   the   contacts   you   want   to   delete    and   then   tap   Delete     When   prompted    tap   OK        To   delete   a   single   contact    on   the   All   tab    press   and   hold   the   name     of   the   contact    not   the   icon   or   photo    who   you   want   to   delete   and     select   Delete contact   from   the   menu        Sending contact information as a vCard via MMS    Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  People     On   the   All   tab    press   and   hold   the   name   of   the   contact    not   the     icon   or   photo    whose   contact   information   you   want   to   send    and     then   tap   Send contact as vCard     Select   the   type   of   information   you   want   to   send    and   then   tap     Send     Enter   the   recipient   s   number   or   email   address    and   then   tap   Send        You   cannot   send   a   vCard   using   SMS     3     1     2     3     4     1     2     3     4     8    People    You   can   also   send   a   vCard   via   Bluetooth    To   learn   how   to   send   files     through   Bluetooth    see   the   Bluetooth   chapter        Sending your contact information as a vCard via MMS    Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  People     On   the   All   tab    tap    Your name  My contact card     Press   MENU    and   then   tap   Send my contact info     Select   the   type   of   information   you   want   to   send
39.     gt    Footprints        Tap   New Footprint    If   GPS   is   not   on    you   are   prompted   to   turn   it     on   so   that   your   phone   can   use   GPS   to   find   your   location     Point   the   camera   at   the   scene   you   want   to   show   the   location      Footprints   starts   to   use   GPS   to   search   for   your   position     To   change   brightness   and   white   balance   settings   before   you   take     a   photo    press   MENU    tap   Brightness   or   White balance    and   then     choose   a   setting     Press   the   optical   trackball   to   capture   the   photo    If   your   GPS     position   has   not   been   found   yet    you   are   asked   whether   to   find     the   position   on   Google   Maps    continue   the   GPS   search    or   stop   the     GPS   search    You   may   also   be   asked   if   you   want   HTC   Footprints   to     automatically   determine   the   address   for   the   location     Tap   Done     Before   pressing   Done    you   can   press   MENU    and   then   tap   Edit   to     change   the   name    category    or   address   of   the   footprint    enter   the     phone   and   website    and   add   a   voice   memo   to   the   footprint     1     2     3     4     5     Maps   and   location       Revisiting a footprint    Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt    Footprints        At   the   bottom   of   the   screen    slide   your   finger   to   select  
40.     learn   how   to   open   the   Notifications   Panel        Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  Market  gt  Downloads    On       the   Download   screen    tap   the   app   to   open   it     Press   HOME            and   then   tap            On   the   All   programs   screen        locate   the   app    and   then   tap   it        1     2     3     4                          More   apps    71    Uninstalling an application  You   can   uninstall   any   application   that   you   have   downloaded   and     installed   from   Android   Market     Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  Market  gt  Downloads     On   the   Downloads   screen    tap   the   application   you   want   to     uninstall    and   then   tap   Uninstall     When   prompted    tap   OK   to   remove   the   application   on   your     phone     Choose   the   reason   for   removing   the   application    and   then   tap   OK     Getting help  If   you   ever   need   help   or   have   questions   about   Android   Market    press     MENU    and   then   tap   Help    The   web   browser   will   take   you   to   the     Android   Market   Help   web   page     1     2     3     4     Security    Protecting your phone with a screen lock    You   can   secure   your   phone   by   requiring   a   screen   unlock   pattern   every     time   your   phone   is   turned   on   or   every   time   it   wakes   up   from   sleep     mode    screen   is   off         P
41.     message    and   then   tap   Send     To   reply   to   a   text   message   with   a   multimedia   message    open   the   text     message    press   MENU   and   then   tap   More    gt    Add subject    or   Attach      The   text   message   is   automatically   converted   into   a   multimedia     message     3     4     1     2     3     Messages    10    Protecting a message from deletion  You   can   lock   a   message   so   that   it   will   not   be   deleted   even   if   you     delete   the   other   messages   in   the   conversation     Press   HOME         and   then   tap         gt    Messages     On   the   All   messages   screen    tap   a   message   thread     Press   and   hold   the   message   that   you   want   to   lock       Tap   Lock message   on   the   options   menu     A   lock   icon        is   displayed   at   the   right   hand   side   of   the   message     Deleting a message thread    Press   HOME         and   then   tap         gt    Messages     On   the   All   messages   screen    tap   the   message   thread   that   you     want   to   delete     Press   MENU    and   then   tap   Delete        When   prompted   to   confirm    tap   OK        Any   locked   messages   in   the   thread   will   not   be   deleted   unless   you     select   the   Delete locked messages   check   box     Deleting several message threads    Press   HOME         and   then   tap         gt    Messages     On   the   All   messages   sc
42.    6    Receiving   calls                                                                                                                       6    Answering   an   incoming   call                                                                                 6  Rejecting   an   incoming   call                                                                                    6  Rejecting   a   call   and   sending   a   text   message                                               6    Using   in call   options                                                                                                           66    Handling   multiple   calls                                                                                            66  Setting   up   a   conference   call                                                                              67  Muting   the   microphone   during   a   call                                                               68  Turning   the   speakerphone   on   or   off   during   a   call                                     68  Ending   a   call                                                                                                                  68    Using   call   history                                                                                                                  69    Adding   a   new   phone   number   to   your   contacts   from   call   history     70  Checking   a   missed   call               
43.    Maps   uses   the   same   satellite   data   as     Google   Earth       Satellite   images   are   not   real time    Google     Earth   acquires   the   best   imagery   available    most   of   which   is     approximately   one   to   three   years   old     1     2                       Maps   and   location    Latitude    When   you   have   joined   Latitude    you   can   view   your     friends      locations   as   a   layer   on   the   map    For   information      see      Finding   your   friends   with   Google   Latitude    available   by     country       in   this   chapter     To   select   more   layers   such   as   transit   lines   or   maps   that   you     have   created   in   Google   Maps   on   the   web    tap   More layers     To   clear   layers   and   view   only   the   street   map    tap   Clear map     Searching for a location    While   viewing   a   map    press   SEARCH          Enter   the   place   you   want   to   search   in   the   search   box    You   can     enter   an   address    a   city    or   type   of   business   or   establishment    for     example    museums   in   London                           1     2     Maps   and   location       As   you   enter   information    a   list   of   all   the   places   which   you   have     searched   or   visited   before   appears   on   the   screen    You   can   also   tap     an   address   on   the   menu   to   show   its   location   on   the   map     You   can   
44.    SD card  amp  phone storage    Check   the   available   storage   card   and   phone   memory        Date  amp  time    Set   the   date   and   time    time   zone    and   date   or   time   format    To   turn   off     auto   time   synchronization   and   be   able   to   manually   change   time   zone     settings    see      Changing   time   zone   settings      in   the   Clock   and   Weather     chapter     Language  amp  keyboard    Set   the   operating   system   language   and   region    You   can   also   set     onscreen   keyboard   options     Accessibility    Enable   or   disable   preset   or   downloaded   accessibility   plugins   that     respond   to   user   interaction   such   as   receiving   sound   feedback   when   a     new   browser   window   is   opened     Text to speech    If   you   have   installed   a   text to speech    voice   data    application    use   this     option   to   configure   the   text to speech   settings     About phone    Set   the   system   software   update   method   and   view   the   phone   status     such   as   the   network   type    signal   strength    battery   power   level    and     network   name    You   can   also   check   the   battery   use   of   individual     applications   or   view   the   legal   information   and   software   version   of   your     phone    See      Checking   information   about   your   phone      in   this   chapter     for   details        Settings    77    C
45.    a   widget    see      Personalizing   your   Home   screen     with   widgets      in   the   Personalizing   chapter     Clock   and   Weather    171    About the Clock application    The   Clock   application   is   more   than   just   a   regular   date   and   time   clock      It   functions   as   a   desk   clock   that   shows   the   date    time    and   weather     information    and   it   can   turn   into   a   night   clock   or   screensaver    It   has   a     world   clock   that   shows   you   the   current   time   in   several   locations   across     the   globe    There   s   also   an   alarm   clock    stopwatch    and   countdown     timer     To   open   the   Clock   application     Press   HOME           and   then   tap   the   HTC   Clock   widget   on   the   Home       screen     You   can   also   press   HOME            tap      and   then   tap   Clock     Tap   the   tabs   at   the   bottom   row   or   slide   your   finger   across   the   tabs   to     switch   between   the   different   functions   of   the   Clock   application     1                  17    Clock   and   Weather    1     Desk   Clock   tab         World   Clock   tab         Alarm   Clock   tab         Stopwatch   tab         Timer   tab    Using Desk Clock    Opening   the   Clock   application   brings   you   directly   to   the   Desk   Clock     screen     The   Desk   Clock   displays   the   current   date    time    and   weather    an   alarm     clock
46.    an   account   does   not   delete   information   from   the   online     service   itself     You   cannot   remove   some   accounts    such   the   first   Google   Account     you   signed   into   on   the   phone    except   by   deleting   all   personal     information   from   your   phone   with   a   hard   reset    For   instructions   on     doing   this    see      Performing   a   hard factory   reset      in   the   Update   and     reset   chapter            1     2     3     1     2     3     11    Accounts   and   sync    Press   HOME            gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings  gt  Accounts  amp     sync        Tap   the   account   that   you   want   to   remove     Tap   Remove account    and   then   confirm   that   you   want   to   remove     the   account     Using HTC Sync    Are   you   using   Microsoft   Outlook   or   Outlook   Express   on   your     computer    You   can   use   HTC Sync   to   synchronize   your   Outlook     contacts   and   calendar   or   your   Outlook   Express   contacts   with   your     phone    Before   you   do   a   factory   reset   or   a   software    ROM    upgrade     of   your   phone    you   can   also   use   HTC   Sync   to   back   up   and   sync   this     information   from   your   phone   back   to   your   computer     Here   s   what   you   ll   need   to   do   to   install    set   up    and   use   HTC   Sync   on     your   computer     Download   and   install   HTC   Sync   f
47.    by   default      You   can   also   display   the   Calendar   in   Agenda    Day    or   Week   view    To     change   between   calendar   views    press   MENU    and   then   choose   the     type   of   view   that   you   want     1     2     3     4     5     6     160    Calendar    Month view  In   Month   view    you   ll   see   markers   on   days   that   have   events     When   in   Month   view     Tap        on   the   bottom   left   of   the   screen   to   switch   to   Agenda       view    Tap        on   the   bottom   right   to   create   a   new   event     Tap   a   day   to   view   the   events   of   that   day     Press   and   hold   a   day   to   open   an   options   menu   from   which   you     can   also   choose   to   create   an   event   or   switch   to   either   Day   or     Agenda   view     Slide   your   finger   up   or   down   the   screen   to   view   earlier   or   later     months                                 Calendar    161    Day and Agenda views  Day   view   displays   a   list   of   the   events   of   one   day   and   also   shows     weather   information   at   the   bottom   of   the   screen   when   you   re   viewing     events   of   the   current   day    Agenda   view   shows   a   list   of   all   your   events     in   chronological   order               The   color   bars   on   the   left   side   of   the   events   indicate   the   type   of     calendar   in   which   the   event   is   par
48.    calendar     and   choose   to   sync   them   automatically   or     manually   with   your   phone     Click   Finish   HTC   Sync   then   starts   to   sync   your   phone   and   your   computer      Wait   for   the   synchronization   to   finish     A   summary   report   is   then   displayed    Click   Close     1     2     3     4     5     6     7     116    Accounts   and   sync    Setting up more sync options  HTC   Sync   gives   you   the   flexibility   to   set   many   options    such   as   setting     a   sync   schedule    choosing   how   to   resolve   conflicts   when   the   same     items   are   found   on   both   the   phone   and   the   computer    and   more     On   your   computer    check   and   make   sure   the   HTC   Sync   icon            at   the   bottom right   side   of   the   screen   appears   in   green   which     means   that   your   phone   is   connected   to   HTC   Sync     If   HTC   Sync   is   not   open    double click   the   green   HTC   Sync   icon   to     open   it     Click   Sync Manager  gt  Settings     In   the   Synchronization   Settings   Wizard   dialog   box    click   Manual  settings     From   the   left   side   of   the   Sync   Manager   Settings   dialog   box    click     the   type   of   setting   you   want   to   change    and   then   choose   from     the   available   options   on   the   right    Settings   that   can   be   changed     include   the   following     Contacts or Cal
49.    capturing     Widescreen  photo mode only   When   this   check   box   is   selected    default     photo   resolutions       1     2     18    Camera    available   for   selection   are   in       ratio   and   you   can   use   the   entire     Viewfinder   screen   to   frame   your   subject    When   not   selected      photo   resolutions   available   for   selection   are   in   standard       ratio     Quality  photo mode only   Select   the   quality   level   to   use   for   capturing   photos     Self timer  photo mode only   If   you   need   to   take   a   self portrait   or   group   photo    you   can   set   the     self timer   to   either      or   10   seconds     Geo tag photos  photo mode only   Select   this   check   box   when   you   want   to   store   GPS   location   in     your   captured   photos     Recording length  video mode only   Set   the   maximum   duration   or   file   size   for   capturing   video     Record with audio  video mode only   Select   or   clear   the   check   box    depending   on   whether   you   want   to     record   audio   when   capturing   videos     Metering mode  Set   how   the   camera   measures   the   amount   of   light   to   calculate     the   best   exposure     Spot   metering   mode   allows   the   camera   to   measure   light     around   the   focus   point     Center area   mode   allows   the   camera   to   measure   light   in   the     center                   Camera    19    Avera
50.    capturing   a   photo   or   video    the   Review   screen   will   display   the     photo   or   the   starting   image   of   the   video   that   you   have   just   captured      You   can   tap   the   onscreen   buttons   to   delete   the   photo   or   video    view   it     in   the   Photos   application    or   share   it     Back    Return   to   the   Viewfinder   screen     Delete    Delete   the   captured   photo   or   video     Share    Send   the   captured   photo   or   video   to   another   phone   or   your   computer     using   Bluetooth    send   it   by   email    or   select   a   social   network   where   you     want   to   upload   it   to     View    Open   and   use   the   Photos   application   to   view   the   captured   photo   or     video    rotate   your   captured   photo    and   more    See   the   Photos   chapter     for   details     1    Camera    Zooming    Before   taking   a   photo   or   video    you   can   first   use   the   onscreen   zoom     bar   to   zoom   in   or   out   of   your   subject     1  To   display   the   onscreen   zoom   bar    tap   the   Zoom   button         You       can   also   slide   your   finger   up   or   down   the   Viewfinder   screen     While   the   zoom   bar   is   shown   on   the   Viewfinder   screen    you   will     also   see   the   remaining   photo   shots   or   remaining   video   recording     duration   on   the   upper right   side   of   the   screen     2  
51.    check   for   the   most   recent   HTC   Sync   upgrade   so   you   can     download   and   install   it   on   your   computer     After   installing   the   latest   upgrade    set   up   HTC   Sync   again   to   recognize     and   sync   with   your   phone    Follow   the   steps   in      Setting   up   HTC   Sync   to     recognize   your   phone      and      Setting   up   synchronization           Installing apps from your computer to your phone  If   you   have   applications     apk   files    on   your   computer    you   can   use     HTC   Sync   to   install   them   to   your   phone    We   strongly   recommend   you     install   only   applications   that   you   trust     On   your   phone    press   HOME            gt    MENU    tap   Settings  gt     Applications    and   then   select   the   Unknown sources   check   box     to   allow   applications   from   your   computer   to   be   installed   to   your     phone     1     2     3     4     1     Accounts   and   sync    119    You   only   have   to   do   this   step   once    You   do   not   need   to   do   this   step     again   next   time   you   install   another   application   from   your   computer   to     your   phone     Connect   your   phone   to   the   computer   with   the   supplied   USB   cable      Or    if   your   phone   is   already   connected    press   and   hold   the   status     bar   and   drag   your   finger   down   to   open   the   Notifications   p
52.    for   Bluetooth     devices   within   range     When   you   see   the   name   of   your   headset   displayed   in   the     Bluetooth   devices   section    tap   the   name    Your   phone   then     automatically   tries   to   pair   with   the   headset     1     2     3     4     1     2     3     4     5     Bluetooth    0    If   automatic   pairing   fails    enter   the   passcode   supplied   with   your     headset     The   pairing   and   connection   status   is   displayed   below   the   hands   free   headset   or   car   kit   name   in   the   Bluetooth   devices   section    When     the   Bluetooth   headset   or   car   kit   is   connected   to   your   phone    the     Bluetooth   connected   icon        is   displayed   in   the   status   bar    Depending       on   the   type   of   headset   or   car   kit   you   have   connected    you   can   then     start   using   the   headset   or   car   kit   to   listen   to   music   and or   make   and     receive   phone   calls     Reconnecting a headset or car kit  When   you   have   paired   a   headset   with   your   phone    you   should   be   able     to   reconnect   it   automatically   by   turning   on   Bluetooth   on   your   phone      and   then   turning   on   the   headset    However    sometimes   you   will   need   to     reconnect   manually    for   example   if   you   have   been   using   your   headset     with   another   Bluetooth   device     Press   HOME        
53.    for   events   such   as   incoming   text    email    calendar   reminders    and   more     Your   phone   s   Home   screen   is   highly   customizable   and   extends   beyond     the   screen   width    giving   you   plenty   of   space   to   add   the   information     that   matters   most   in   your   daily   life   and   phone   features   that   make     communication   quicker   and   easier    You   have   up   to   seven   screens   that     extend   to   the   left   and   right   sides   of   your   display   as   your   Home   screen      on   which   you   can   add   elements   such   as   widgets    program   icons      shortcuts   to   information    and   more     To   find   out   how   to   set   notification   sounds   for   events    see      Changing     sound   settings        Changing the ringtone    Choose   from   the   available   selections   of   ringtones   on   your   phone     Press   HOME         gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings     Tap   Personalize  gt  Default ringtone    The   Phone   ringtone   selection     menu   then   opens     Scroll   through   the   available   ringtones   and   tap   the   ringtone   you     want   to   use    The   ringtone   briefly   plays   when   selected     Tap   OK     1     2     3     4     0    Personalizing    You   can   also   download   or   copy   ringtones   or   songs   to   your   phone   s     storage   card    To   find   out   how   you   can   copy   files   to   your   s
54.    in   normal   view   or   reformatted   view      Choosing   Reformatted   reflows   the   text   and   resizes   the   images     to   fit   the   width   of   the   screen    depending   on   the   zoom   level        1     2     3     4     5     6     1     2     3                          More   apps    9    Zoom   to   change   the   zoom   level   to   either   Fit to screen   or   Fit  to width    This   is   not   available   when   Reformatted   is   selected     for   View     Go to   go   to   a   specific   page   on   the   PDF     More   to   search   the   PDF   and   view   file   properties   or   information     about   the   PDF   Viewer     Turn   your   phone   sideways    turn   to   the   left    to   view   the   PDF   file     in   landscape   mode    The   screen   orientation   automatically   adjusts     depending   on   how   you   hold   the   phone        Viewing documents  presentations  and spread   sheets    Quickoffice   lets   you   view   Microsoft   Office   Word    Microsoft   Office     Excel    and   Microsoft   PowerPoint   files   on   your   phone    Quickoffice     supports   viewing   of   Microsoft   Office   00   and   007   Word     doc       Excel     xls     PowerPoint     ppt    and   text     txt    files     Make   sure   you   have   copied   the   files   to   the   phone   s   storage   card   before     you   open   Quickoffice    See      Copying   files   to   and   from   the   storage   card        in   the   B
55.    indicator    and   a   battery   charging   indicator    You   can   dim   the     screen   to   show   only   the   time   and   date   on   the   Desk   Clock       1     Clock   and   Weather    17    1     The   alarm   clock   indicator   shows   whether   the   alarm   clock   is   on   or   off    To     find   out   how   to   turn   on   and   set   the   alarm   clock    see      Setting   the   alarm     clock             Below   the   date   and   time    you   ll   see   the   weather   information   of   your     current   location    Tapping   the   weather   information   brings   you   to   the     Weather   application   where   you   can   see   weather   forecasts   of   the   next   few     days    See      Checking   weather      for   more   information   about   the   Weather     application          The   battery   charging   indicator   shows   the   battery   charge   level    You   ll   see   it     only   when   your   phone   is   plugged   with   the   power   adapter   or   connected   to     your   computer          Tap   this   button   to   dim   the   screen   and   display   only   the   time   and   date   on     the   Desk   Clock    To   light   up   the   screen   again    tap   anywhere   on   the   screen     or   press   the   BACK        button   on   your   phone          Tap   this   button   to   dim   the   screen   and   go   into   screensaver   mode    When   in     screensaver   mode    the   time   and   date   will   c
56.    other   conversation   list     Starring a message  You   can   star   an   important   message   so   that   you   can   easily   find   it   again      Conversations   with   starred   messages   are   displayed   with   a   star   in   your     Inbox   and   other   conversation   lists    To   view   just   conversations   with     starred   messages    see      Viewing   conversations   by   label      in   this   chapter     1     2     3     1    Email    Do   one   of   the   following     While   reading   a   message    touch   the   star   in   its   header     When   viewing   a   conversation    touch   its   star   to   start   the   newest     message   in   the   conversation     To   unstar   a   message    touch   its   star   again    You   can   also   touch   a   star   in     a   conversation   list   to   unstar   all   messages   in   the   conversation     Labeling a conversation  You   can   organize   conversations   by   labeling   them    Gmail Google   Mail     has   several   preset   labels   you   can   use    and   you   can   also   add   your   own     labels    using   Gmail Google   Mail   on   the   web     While   viewing   the   messages   in   a   conversation    press   MENU   and     then   touch   Change labels     Select   the   labels   that   you   want   to   assign   to   the   conversation    and     then   tap   OK     Viewing conversations by label  You   can   view   a   list   of   the   conversations   that   have   t
57.    phone   to   adjust     the   media   volume    The   Music video   volume   window   appears   on   the     screen   to   display   the   volume   level        You   can   also   adjust   the   media   volume   on   the   Settings   screen        Press   HOME            gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings  gt  Sound  amp     display  gt  Media volume     When   the   Media   volume   window   appears    drag   the   slider   to   the     left   to   lower   the   volume   or   to   the   right   to   increase   the   volume     1     2     1     2     Basics       Tap   OK   to   close   the   window     Connecting your phone to a computer    Whenever   you   connect   your   phone   to   a   computer   using   the   USB     cable    the   Connect   to   PC   dialog   box   displays   and   prompts   you   to     choose   the   type   of   USB   connection    Select   one   of   the   following     choices    and   then   tap   Done        Charge only    Select   this   mode   if   you   only   want   to   charge   the   phone   s   battery   using     your   computer        HTC Sync    When   selected    the   phone   automatically   uses   HTC   Sync   when     connected   to   your   computer   and   lets   you   synchronize   Outlook   and     Windows   Address   Book    Outlook   Express     contacts   and   calendar     events   between   your   computer   and   your   phone    For   more   information      see      Using   HTC   Sync      in   the   Accounts 
58.    reset    To   perform   a   soft   reset    remove     the   battery    wait   for   a   few   seconds    and   then   re install   it    After   re   installing   the   battery    turn   on   the   phone     Performing a factory reset via settings  The   most   convenient   way   to   do   a   factory   reset   is   via   the   phone     settings     Press   HOME            gt    MENU    then   tap   Settings     Scroll   down   the   screen    and   then   tap   Privacy  gt  Factory data  reset     On   the   Factory   data   reset   screen    tap Reset phone  and   then   tap     Erase everything        Performing a factory reset using phone buttons    1     2     3     86    Update   and   reset    If   you   cannot   turn   on   your   phone   or   access   the   phone   settings    you     can   still   perform   a   factory   reset   by   using   the   buttons   on   the   phone     With   the   phone   turned   off    press   and   hold   the   VOLUME   DOWN     button    and   then   briefly   press   the   POWER   button        Wait   for   the   screen   with   the      Android   images   to   appear    and     then   release   the   VOLUME   DOWN   button        Press   VOLUME   DOWN   to   select   CLEAR STORAGE    and   then     press   POWER        When   asked   to   confirm    press   VOLUME   UP        1     2     3     4     Specifications    CPU speed  1   GHz    Platform  Android       1      clair    with   HTC   Sense       Memory  ROM    1   MB  RAM
59.    suggested   links      On   the   screen    you   can     If   there   are   suggested   links    tap        to   link   the   contact   to       the   selected   account     Tap   one   of   the   options   available   in   the   Add contact   section        Tap   Done        Breaking the contact information link between contacts    Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  People     On   the   All   tab    tap   the   name   of   the   contact    not   the   icon   or     photo    whose   contact   information   link   you   want   to   break     On   the   upper   right   corner   of   the   screen    tap          On   the   Linked contacts   section    tap        beside   the   name   of   the       contact   to   break   the   link        Tap   Done        1     2     3     4                   5     1     2     3     4     5     80    People    Editing a contact   s information    Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  People     On   the   All   tab    press   and   hold   the   contact    and   then   tap   Edit  contact     Enter   the   new   information   for   the   contact     Scroll   to   the   bottom   of   the   screen    and   then   tap   Save     Searching for a contact    Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  People     Press   the   SEARCH        button   on   the   phone     In   the   search   bar    enter   the   first   few   letters   of   the   first   or   last     name   of   the   contact   you   are   looking  
60.    t   need   to   enter   it   the   next   time    For   this   reason    you   should   secure     your   phone   to   prevent   others   from   using   it   without   your   permission      See   the   Security   chapter   to   learn   how   to   secure   your   phone     Requesting a refund for an application  If   you   are   not   satisfied   with   an   application    you   can   ask   for   a   refund     within      hours   of   the   purchase    Your   credit   card   is   not   charged   and     the   application   is   uninstalled   from   your   phone     If   you   change   your   mind    you   can   install   the   application   again    but   you     can   t   request   a   refund   a   second   time     Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  Market  gt  Menu  gt  Downloads     Tap   the   application   to   uninstall   for   a   refund    The   details   screen   for     the   application   opens     Tap   Uninstall  amp  refund    Your   application   is   uninstalled   and   the     charge   is   cancelled     Choose   the   reason   for   removing   the   application    and   then   tap   OK     Opening an installed application  Do   one   of   the   following     On   the   status   bar    check   if   you   see   the        icon    If   you   see   the            icon    open   the   Notifications   Panel    and   then   tap   the   app   to   open     it    See      Opening   the   Notifications   panel      in   the   Basics   chapter   to 
61.    tap         and   then   tap   Photos     Tap   the   album   where   the   photo   or   video   you   want   to   share   is   in     Tap        and   then   on   the   Share   options   menu    tap   Messages     Tap   the   photo   or   video   you   want   to   send        The   photo   or   video   is   automatically   added   into   the   MMS     message     Compose   your   message   and   then   tap   Send        1     2     3     4     5     1     2     3     4     5     6     0    Photos    Sending photos or videos using Bluetooth  You   can   select   several   photos    videos    or   both   and   send   them   to     someone   s   phone   or   your   computer   using   Bluetooth     Press   HOME            tap         and   then   tap   Photos     Tap   the   album   where   the   photos   or   videos   you   want   to   share   are     in     Tap        and   then   on   the   Share   options   menu    tap   Bluetooth     Select   the   photos   or   videos   you   want   to   share   and   then   tap   Next     In   the   next   few   steps    you   ll   be   asked   to   turn   on   Bluetooth   on     your   phone   and   connect   to   the   receiving   Bluetooth   device   so   the     files   can   be   sent    Follow   the   steps   in      Sending   information   from     your   phone   to   another   device      in   the   Bluetooth   chapter        Sharing photos on Facebook  You   need   to   be   logged   in   to   your   Facebook   account   to   
62.    tap   Forgot  pattern    You   will   be   prompted   to   sign   in   using   your   Google   Account     name   and   password    and   create   a   new   screen   unlock   pattern   before     the   Home   screen   displays        You   need   to   be   connected   to   a   data   or   Wi Fi   connection   to   be   able   to     sign   in   to   your   Google   Account     Settings    Settings on your phone    Control   and   customize   phone   settings   on   the   Settings   screen     To   open   the   Settings   screen    press   HOME            gt    MENU    and   then   tap       Settings        Personalize    Select   a   scene    set   the   Home   screen   or   Lockscreen   wallpaper   to   use      and   set   the   default   ringtone   to   use   for   incoming   calls    You   can   also     rename   or   delete   a   custom   scene   by   pressing   and   holding   a   custom     scene   in   Scenes     Wireless  amp  networks    Configure   your   phone   s   wireless   connections    such   as   Wi Fi   and     Bluetooth    enable   the   Airplane   mode    or   set   the   options   for   mobile     networks    roaming    Virtual   Private   Networks    and   more     Call    Set   up   call   services   such   as   voicemail   and   TTY   mode     Sound  amp  display    Set   the   phone   and   notification   ringtones    automatic   screen   orientation      and   set   the   screen   brightness   and   screen   timeout     Settings    7    Accounts
63.    the   attachment   to   open   it         If   the   attachment   is   a   vCard   contact    it   is   imported   to   your   Phone     contacts   list    For   information   about   contacts    see   the   People     chapter      If   the   attachment   is   a   vCalendar   file    you   can   choose   the   calendar     where   you   want   to   save   the   event    For   information   on   using     Calendar    see   the   Calendar   chapter     To   save   the   attachment   to   the   storage   card    press   and   hold   the     sender   s   name   or   number    and   then   tap   Save  attachment type      on   the   options   menu     When   Auto retrieve   in   MMS   settings   is   disabled    only   the   message     header   is   downloaded    To   download   the   entire   message    tap   the     Download   button   at   the   right   side   of   the   message    For   details    see        Setting   text   and   multimedia   message   options      later   in   this   chapter     If   you   are   concerned   about   the   size   of   your   data   downloads    check     the   multimedia   message   size   before   you   download   it                   Replying to a text or multimedia message    Press   HOME         and   then   tap         gt    Messages     On   the   All   messages   screen    tap   a   text   or   multimedia   message     thread   to   open   it     Tap   the   text   box   at   the   bottom   of   the   screen    enter   your   reply 
64.    the   ringtone   list   and   selected        1     2     3     1     2     3     4     5     1     2     Music    9    Sending music using Bluetooth    You   can   select   a   song   from   the   Music   application   s   Library   and   send     it   to   someone   s   phone   or   your   computer   using   Bluetooth    only     unprotected   files   can   be   sent      Press   HOME            tap      and   then   tap   Music     Tap        at   the   bottom left   corner   of   the   screen   to   go   to   the       Library     In   the   Library    select   the   song   that   you   want   to   use   as   ringtone     and   then   play   it   back     On   the   Playback   screen    press   MENU   and   then   tap   Share  gt   Bluetooth     In   the   next   few   steps    you   ll   be   asked   to   turn   on   Bluetooth   on     your   phone   and   connect   to   the   receiving   Bluetooth   device   so   the     music   can   be   sent    Follow   the   steps   in      Sending   information   from     your   phone   to   another   device      in   the   Bluetooth   chapter     About the Music widget    You   can   use   the   Music   widget   to   play   music   right   from   your   Home     screen    To   find   out   how   you   can   add   this   widget   to   your   Home     screen    see      Personalizing   your   Home   screen   with   widgets      in   the     Personalizing   chapter     1     2     3     4     5     Maps and location    Using Googl
65.    type   and   to   show   or   hide     the   Connect   to   PC   dialog   box    press   HOME            gt    MENU    and   then   tap       Settings    gt    Connect   to   PC     Copying files to and from the storage card    Connect   the   phone   to   your   computer   using   the   supplied   USB     cable     When   the   Connect   to   PC   dialog   box   appears    tap   Disk drive    and     then   tap   Done     On   your   computer    the   connected   phone   is   recognized   as   a     removable   disk    Navigate   to   this   removable   disk   and   open   it     Do   one   of   the   following     Copy   the   files   from   the   computer   to   the   phone   s   storage     card   s   root   folder     Copy   the   files   from   the   phone   s   storage   card   to   a   folder   in     your   computer   or   computer   desktop     5  After   copying   the   files    unmount   the   removable   disk    that   is    the       connected   phone    as   required   by   your   computer   s   operating       1     2     3     4                   Basics    7    system   to   safely   remove   your   phone     6  Do   one   of   the   following     Disconnect   the   phone   from   the   computer        If   you   want   to   keep   the   phone   connected   to   the   computer   but     want   the   phone   to   be   able   to   access   the   storage   card    open     the   Notifications   panel    tap   Disk drive    select   an   option   except     Di
66.    voice                                                                                                      6    Recording   your   voice                                                                                            6  Sharing   a   voice   clip                                                                                                6  Setting   a   voice   clip   as   a   ringtone                                                                   6  Renaming   a   voice   clip                                                                                          6        19    Using   Voice   Search                                                                                                           6    Opening   Voice   Search                                                                                          6    Finding   and   installing   apps   from   Android   Market                                             67    Finding   and   installing   an   application                                                            68  Creating   a   Google   Checkout   account                                                          69  Requesting   a   refund   for   an   application                                                       70  Opening   an   installed   application                                                                    70  Uninstalling   an   application                                                                     
67.    width   of   the   screen     4                                        More   apps    61    Keeping track of your stocks    Use   Stocks   to   get   the   latest   stock   updates   for   stock   quotes   and     market   indices   you   follow        1      1     List   of   your   stock   quotes   and   stock   market   indices    Tap   an   item   to   view   its     intraday   chart   and   other   details          Tap   to   update   the   stock   information          Tap   to   add   a   stock   quote   or   stock   market   index          Shows   the   time   the   information   was   last   updated     6    More   apps    Adding a stock quote or stock market index    Press   HOME            and   then   tap   gt  Stocks        On   the Stocks   screen    tap        at   the   bottom right   corner   of   the       screen        If   there   are   no   stock   quotes   or   indices   onscreen    tap   Tap here to add a  stock or index   at   the   top   of   the   screen     Enter   the   stock   quote   or   stock   market   index   on   the   text   field    and     then   tap          On   the   results   list    tap   the   stock   quote   or   stock   market   index   you     want   to   add        Changing the stock list order    Press   HOME            and   then   tap   gt  Stocks        Press   MENU    and   then   tap   Rearrange        Press   and   hold        at   the   end   of   the   item   you   want   to   move        When   the   row   is   highl
68.    without   prior   notice     No   part   of   this   document   may   be   reproduced   or   transmitted   in     any   form   or   by   any   means    electronic   or   mechanical    including     photocopying    recording   or   storing   in   a   retrieval   system    or   translated     into   any   language   in   any   form   without   prior   written   permission   of   HTC     6       Conventions used in this guide    In   this   user   guide    we   use   the   following   symbols   to   indicate   useful   and     important   information     This   is   a   note    A   note   often   gives   additional   information    such   as   what     happens   on   your   phone   when   you   choose   to   do   or   not   to   do   a   certain     action    A   note   also   provides   information   that   may   only   be   applicable   to     some   situations        This   is   a   tip    A   tip   gives   you   an   alternative   way   to   do   a   particular   step   or     procedure    or   lets   you   know   of   an   option   that   you   may   find   helpful     This   indicates   that   something   is   very   important    Important   information   is     something   that   you   need   to   do   in   order   to   accomplish   a   certain   task   or   to     get   a   phone   feature   to   work   properly     This   provides   safety   precaution   information    that   is    information   that   you     need   to   be   careful   about   to   prevent   potenti
69.    your   destination   appear   in   a   list    Tap   a     direction   instruction   on   the   list   to   show   the   map        1     2     3     4     Maps   and   location    7    When   you   are   finished   viewing   or   following   the   directions    press   MENU     and   then   tap   More    gt    Clear map to   reset   the   map    Your   destination   is     automatically   saved   in   the   Google   Maps   history     8    Maps   and   location    Finding your friends with Google Latitude  available by  country   Google Latitude      user   location   service   lets   you   and   your   friends   share     locations   and   status   messages   with   each   other    It   also   lets   you   send     instant   messages   and   emails    make   phone   calls    and   get   directions   to     your   friends      locations        Your   location   is   not   shared   automatically    You   must   join   Latitude      and   then   invite   your   friends   to   view   your   location   or   accept   their     invitations        Joining Latitude    While   viewing   a   map    press   MENU   and   then   tap   Join Latitude     Read   the   privacy   policy    If   you   agree   with   it    tap   Agree  amp  share        After   you   join   Latitude    you   can   start   sharing   your   locations   with   your     friends    Only   friends   that   you   have   explicitly   invited   or   accepted   can     see   your   location        Opening Latitude  Af
70.   6    Watching   videos                                                                                                     6  Searching   for   videos                                                                                              7  Sharing   a   video   link                                                                                                  7  Capturing   a   video   and   sharing   it   on   YouTube                                          8    Viewing   a   PDF                                                                                                                  8  Viewing   documents    presentations    and   spreadsheets                                  9  Keeping   track   of   your   stocks                                                                                         61    Adding   a   stock   quote   or   stock   market   index                                           6  Changing   the   stock   list   order                                                                             6  Deleting   stock   quotes   and   indices                                                                 6  Setting   stock   information   update   frequency                                            6  Manually   updating   stock   information                                                           6  Adding   the   Stocks   widget                                                                                 6    Recording   your
71.   Delete all     Call services    Your   phone   can   directly   link   to   the   mobile   phone   network    and   enable     you   to   access   and   change   the   settings   of   various   phone   services   for     your   phone    Call   services   may   include   call   forwarding    call   waiting      voicemail    and   more    Contact   your   service   provider   to   find   out   about     the   availability   of   call   services   for   your   phone     To   open   call   services    press   HOME         gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings  gt     Call        Voicemail service    Shows   the   current   voicemail   service   being   used        Voicemail settings    Specify   voicemail   number     Clear voicemail notification    1     2     3                   7    Phone   calls    If   you   have   a   notification   of   a   new   voicemail    you   can   clear   the     notification   with   this   option     TTY mode    Allow   the   use   of   a   TTY    teletypewriter    device   for   users   who   are     visually   or   hearing   impaired     Hearing aids    Turn   on   the   Hearing   Aid   Compliance   feature   that   reduces   interference     to   hearing   aids     Phone settings    Edit   the   call   reject   message    choose   whether   to   open   the   message     editor   when   you   reject   a   call   with   a   message    and   choose   whether   to     allow   automatic   saving   of   an   unknown   contact   number   when   
72.   Twitter   user   s   profile    This   also   shows   you   all   tweets   from     this   Twitter   user             Tap   to   enter   a   tweet   to   send   out             Press   and   hold   to   open   the   options   menu   to   let   you   reply    send   a   direct     message    retweet    add   to   favorite    and   view   the   profile          Shows   all   the   tweets   from   people   you   follow   and   tweets   that   you   have     sent   out             Shows   all   tweets   that   mentions   your   username   using   the        your     username       convention        6     Shows   all   private direct   messages   that   you   have   received   or   sent   out        7     Shows   tweets   that   were   marked   as   favorites     Sending a tweet    Press   HOME               and   then   tap      gt  Peep     On   the   All Tweets   tab    tap   the   text   field   with   the   words      What   s     happening         Enter   your   tweet    and   then   tap   Update    Before   tapping   Update      you   can        Tap        to   post   a   picture   from   Photos   or   Camera   to   your       default   photo   hosting   site   and   add   the   link   to   the   picture   into     the   tweet     Tap        to   insert   your   location   into   the   tweet    You   can   choose       to   add   a   map   link    insert   your   location   name    or   insert   your     position   coordinates     Searching for Twitter users to follow    
73.   a     new   email   message                 The   browser   also   recognizes   some   phone   numbers   and   addresses   that     allow   you   to   call   the   phone   number   or   locate   the   address   in   Google     Maps       When   you   navigate   to   a   recognized   phone   number   or   address      it   is   highlighted        Link  What to do    Location  address    Tap   the   address   to   open   Google   Maps   and   locate   the     address        Phone number  Tap   to   open   the   phone   dialer   to   call   the   phone   number        Internet    19    You   can   also   navigate   to   a   link   on   a   web   page   and   select   it   using   the     optical   trackball    This   is   particularly   useful   when   viewing   text   and   links     at   a   small   size    Links   are   enclosed   in   a   colored   box   when   selected     1    1     Link   is   selected        2     Link   is   not   selected     After   selecting   a   link   with   the   optical   trackball    you   can   press   the     optical   trackball   to   open   the   link    or   press   and   hold   the   optical     trackball   for   more   options        Opening a new browser window  Open   multiple   browser   windows   to   make   it   easier   for   you   to   switch     from   one   web   site   to   another    You   can   open   up   to      browser   windows     While   viewing   a   web   page    press   MENU   and   then   tap   Windows     Tap   t
74.   a     notification   sound   when   a   new   email   message   arrives    On     the   ringtone   menu    select   a   ringtone   specific   to   new   email     messages    The   ringtone   plays   briefly   when   selected    If   you     don   t   want   a   ringtone   to   play   when   you   receive   a   new   email     message    tap   Silent    To   confirm   your   ringtone   selection    tap     OK     Select   Vibrate   if   you   want   your   phone   to   vibrate   when   you     receive   a   new   email   message     1     2     3                                                             Email    17    Mail    The   Mail   application   lets   you   send   and   receive   email   from   your     webmail   or   other   accounts    using   POP   or   IMAP        It   also   lets   you   access   your   Exchange   ActiveSync   email   and   other     features   on   your   phone    For   information   on   this    see      Exchange     ActiveSync   email      in   this   chapter        Adding a POP3 IMAP email account    Press   HOME           and   then   tap         gt    Mail        Do   one   of   the   following     If   this   is   your   first   time   to   add   an   email   account   in   Mail    tap     Other  POP3 IMAP  on   the   Choose a mail provider   screen     If   you   have   already   added   an   email   account   in   Mail    tap        on       the   upper left   corner    and   then   tap   New Account    If   the     Choose a mail pro
75.   a   VPN   connection                                                                                188  Connecting   to   a   VPN                                                                                             188  Disconnecting   from   a   VPN                                                                                 189    Using   your   phone   s   web   browser                                                                               189    Opening   the   browser                                                                                             189  Going   to   a   web   page                                                                                             190  Setting   your   home   page                                                                                      190  Changing   the   screen   orientation                                                                     190  Browsing   full   versions   of   all   web   sites                                                             191  Navigating   on   a   web   page                                                                                    191  Zooming   in   or   out   on   a   web   page                                                                  191  Selecting   a   link   in   a   web   page                                                                           19  Opening   a   new   browser   window                                       
76.   addresses   with   a   comma    You   can   add   as   many   message     recipients   as   you   want      As   you   enter   email   addresses    any   matching   addresses   from   your     contacts   list   are   displayed    Tap   a   match   to   enter   that   address     directly     If   you   want   to   send   a   carbon   copy    Cc    or   a   blind   carbon   copy    Bcc      of   the   email   to   other   recipients    press   MENU   and   then   tap   Add Cc   Bcc     Enter   the   email   subject    and   then   compose   your   email     If   you   want   to   add   a   picture   attachment    press   MENU   and   then     tap   Attach    Navigate   to   the   picture   you   want   to   attach    and   then     tap   the   picture     1     2     3     4     5     1    Email      1     1     Recipient             Subject             Attachment          Enter   your   message   here          Tap   to   remove   the   attachment     After   composing   your   message    tap   Send     While   composing   the   message    tap   Save as draft   or   press   BACK            to   save   it   as   a   draft    To   view   your   draft   email   messages    in   the   Inbox      press   MENU   and   then   tap   View labels  gt  Drafts     Adding a signature to your messages  You   can   add   a   signature   to   email   messages   that   you   send     In   the   Inbox    press   MENU   and   then   tap   Settings  gt  Signature     Enter   your   signature   
77.   after   tapping   OK    you   re     redirected   to   the   Google   Checkout   screen   to   pay   for   the     application   before   it   s   downloaded   to   your   phone     Read it carefully     Be   especially   cautious   with   applications   that   have     access   to   many   functions   or   a   significant   amount   of   your   data    Once     you   tap   OK   on   this   screen    you   are   responsible   for   the   results   of   using     this   item   on   your   phone     After   installing   an   app    tap        on   the   upper left   side   of   the   screen   to       return   to   Android   Market   home    You   can   also   press   MENU    and   then     tap   Home        Creating a Google Checkout account  You   must   have   a   Google   Checkout   account   associated   with   your     Google   Account   to   purchase   items   from   Android   Market        Do   one   of   the   following     On   your   computer    go   to   http   checkout google com   to   create   a     Google   Checkout   account     The   first   time   you   use   your   phone   to   buy   an   item   from   Android     Market    you   re   prompted   to   enter   your   billing   information   to   set     up   a   Google   Checkout   account     6                   70    More   apps    When   you   ve   used   Google   Checkout   once   to   purchase   an   application     from   Android   Market    the   phone   remembers   your   password    so   you     don
78.   amp  sync    Log   in   or   out   from   your   social   network   accounts    Google   Account    and     Exchange   ActiveSync   account    You   can   also   manage   synchronization     and   other   settings   for   your   accounts    See   the   Accounts   and   sync     chapter   for   details        Location    Select   the   sources   to   use   when   determining   your   location     Search    Select   items   to   include   when   you   do   a   search   on   your   phone   and   set     Google   search   options        Privacy    Select   whether   to   allow   or   block   Google   from   using   your   location   when     suggesting   results   and   for   other   Google   services    You   can   also   reset     the   phone    See   the   Update   and   reset   chapter   for   more   details     Connect to PC    Set   the   default   USB   connection   type   when   you   connect   your   phone   to     your   computer    Select   Ask me   to   always   display   the   connection   type     dialog   box   when   the   device   is   connected    See      Connecting   your   phone     to   a   computer      in   the   Basics   chapter   for   details     Security    Set   the   screen   unlock   pattern   or   manage   the   phone   s   credential   storage      See   the   Security   chapter   for   details   on   setting   the   screen   unlock   pattern     Applications    Manage   applications   and   installation   of   new   programs     76    Settings 
79.   an   electrical   outlet   to   start   charging   the       battery     Basics    1    As   the   battery   is   being   charged    the   notification   LED   shows   a   solid   red     light   when   the   battery   is   being   charged    The   light   turns   to   solid   green     when   the   phone   is   fully   charged     When   you   charge   the   battery   while   the   phone   is   on    the   charging     battery   icon                is   displayed   in   the   status   bar   of   the   Home   screen        After   the   battery   has   been   fully   charged    a   full   battery   icon                will       be   displayed   in   the   status   bar   of   the   Home   screen     Only   the   AC   adapter   and   USB   sync   cable   provided   with   your   phone   must   be     used   to   charge   the   battery     Do   not   remove   the   battery   from   the   phone   while   you   are   charging   it     using   the   AC   or   car   adapter     As   a   safety   precaution    the   battery   stops   charging   when   it   overheats                             Finger gestures    Tap    When   you   want   to   type   using   the   keyboard    select   items   onscreen     such   as   application   and   settings   icons    or   press   onscreen   buttons      simply   tap   them   with   your   finger        Press and hold    To   open   the   available   options   for   an   item    e g    contact   or   link   in   a   web     page     simply   
80.   and   sync   chapter     Disk drive    This   mode   is   available   only   when   you   have   installed   a   microSD   card   on     your   phone    Select   this   mode   when   you   want   to   use   your   storage   card     as   a   USB   thumb   drive    and   copy   files   between   your   phone   s   storage     card   and   your   computer     When   Disk   Drive   mode   is   enabled   while   your   phone   is   connected   to     the   computer    you   will   not   be   able   to   run   applications   that   use   the     storage   card    such   as   Music   or   Photos    For   more   information    see        Copying   files   to   and   from   the   storage   card      in   this   chapter     3     6    Basics    Internet sharing    When   you   do   not   have   Internet   connection   on   your   computer    you     can   select   this   mode   to   share   your   phone   s   mobile   data   connection     with   your   computer    For   more   information    see      Using   Your   Phone   as   a     Modem      in   the   Internet   chapter     If   you   do   not   want   to   show   the   Connect   to   PC   dialog   box   every   time     you   connect   the   phone   to   the   computer    clear   the   Ask   me   checkbox     in   the   Connect   to   PC   dialog   box    The   default   connection   type   will   be     used   when   you   connect   the   phone   to   the   computer        To   check   or   change   the   default   connection
81.   device  Battery   is   low    0    remaining     Airplane   mode  Battery   is   full    Alarm   is   set  Battery   is   charging    Speakerphone   on  Wired   microphone   headset     connected    Data   synchronizing  Wired   headset   connected    Signal   strength    0    Basics    Notification icons  These   are   the   icons   that   may   appear   on   the   notifications   area   of   the     status   bar     New   Gmail Google   Mail   message  More    not   displayed    notifications    New   Microsoft   Exchange     ActiveSync   or   POP IMAP   email  Call   in   progress    New   SMS MMS  Missed   call    Problem   with   SMS MMS   delivery  Call   on   hold    New   Google   Talk   instant   message  Call   forwarding   on    New   voicemail  Compass   needs   orientation    Upcoming   event  Uploading   data    animated     Song   is   playing  Downloading   data    animated     General   notification    for   example      Phone   connected   to   computer   via     USB   cable      Waiting   to   upload    Storage   card   is   low   on   free   space  Downloaded   Android   Market     application   installed   successfully    Wi Fi   is   on   and   wireless   networks     are   available    Update   available   for   an   application     downloaded   from   Android   Market    Data   synchronizing   or   connected     to   HTC   Sync    Storage   card   is   safe   to   remove   or     storage   card   is   being   prepared    New   tweet  No   storage   c
82.   digits   and   have   at   least   one   of   the   following     Numbers   preceded   by   a             in   front    For   example     1 987 6   1   or    198761     Numbers   enclosed   in   parenthesis   in   front    For   example       0 98761   or    0 987 6 1     Numbers   separated   by   dashes    For   example     0  987 6 1     or   0987 6 1     Tap   Call     For   more   information   about   email    see   the   Email   chapter        1     2     3     4     1     2     3     4                          5     Phone   calls    6    Making an emergency call  On   the   phone   dialer   screen    dial   the   international   emergency   number     for   your   locale    for   example    911     and   then   tap   Call     Your   phone   can   only   operate   when   in   a   CDMA   service   area     Receiving calls    When   you   receive   a   phone   call   from   a   contact    the   Incoming   call     screen   appears   and   displays   the   caller   ID   icon    name    and   phone     number   of   the   calling   party    When   you   receive   a   phone   call   from     someone   who   is   not   stored   in   People    only   the   default   caller   ID   icon     and   phone   number   appear   on   the   Incoming   call   screen     Answering an incoming call  Depending   if   the   display   is   on   or   off    you   need   to     If   the   display   is   on    tap   Answer     If   the   display   is   off    the   display   will   turn   on 
83.   example    if   you   send   an   image   file     to   another   mobile   phone    it   may   be   saved   in   a   folder   named        Images                         4     5     6     7     8                          Bluetooth    07    Receiving information from another device  Your   device   is   capable   of   receiving   a   wide   variety   of   file   types   with     Bluetooth    including   photos    music   tracks    and   documents   such   as   PDFs     To   receive   files   from   another   device    you   need   to   have   an   SD   card     installed   in   your   phone     Press   HOME         gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings    gt    Wireless  amp     networks    gt    Bluetooth settings        If   Bluetooth   is   not   switched   on    tap   the   Bluetooth   check   box   to     switch   it   on        Tap   the   Discoverable   check   box        On   the   sending   device    send   one   or   more   files   to   your   phone      Refer   to   the   device   s   documentation   for   instructions   on   sending     information   over   Bluetooth        If   prompted    enter   the   same   passcode   on   both   your   phone   and     the   other   device    or   confirm   the   auto generated   passcode    A     Bluetooth   authorization   request   is   displayed   on   your   phone        If   you   want   to   automatically   receive   files   from   the   sending   device     in   future    select   the   Always   check   box       
84.   icons   and   other   shortcuts   on   your   Home   screen         Adding   folders   on   your   Home   screen                                                                        6    Creating   a   new   folder   and   adding   items   to   it                                              7  Renaming   a   folder                                                                                                     8    Rearranging   or   removing   widgets   and   icons   on   your   Home   screen          8    Moving   a   widget   or   icon                                                                                        8        9    Removing   a   widget   or   icon                                                                                  9    Phone calls  60    Making   calls                                                                                                                            60    Calling   somebody   using   your   phone                                                                60  Calling   a   speed   dial   number                                                                                  61  Calling   a   phone   number   in   a   text   message                                                  6  Calling   a   phone   number   in   an   email                                                                 6  Making   an   emergency   call                                                                                  
85.   if   you   want   to   receive   a   notification   in   the   status   bar     when   a   new   text   or   multimedia   message   arrives     Play notification sound    If   you   want   the   phone   to   ring   when   a   new   message   arrives    select   this     option     Notification sound    Select   a   ringtone   that   is   specific   to   new   text   and   multimedia     messages    Note   that   the   ringtone   briefly   plays   when   selected     Vibrate    Select   this   option   if   you   want   the   phone   to   vibrate   when   a   new   text   or     multimedia   message   arrives     Sent messages    Sent notification    Select   this   option   if   you   want   to   receive   a   notification   in   the   status   bar     when   a   message   is   sent   successfully     Failure notification    Select   this   option   if   you   want   to   receive   a   notification   in   the   status   bar     when   a   message   is   not   sent   successfully     Play notification sound    If   you   want   the   phone   to   ring   when   a   sent   or   failure   notification   is     received    select   this   option     Messages    107    Notification sound    Select   a   ringtone   that   is   specific   to   sent   or   failure   notifications    Note     that   the   ringtone   briefly   plays   when   selected     Vibrate    Select   this   option   if   you   want   the   phone   to   vibrate   when   a   new   text   or     multimedia   messa
86.   information   about   composing   and   sending     messages    see   the   Messages   chapter     You   will   be   charged   by   your   mobile   provider   for   each   message   sent      For   example    if   you   send   a   message   to   a   group   of   five   people    you   will     be   charged   for   five   messages     Tap   Send group mail   to   send   an   email   to   the   group    For     information   on   composing   and   sending   email    see   the   Email     chapter     Contact information and conversations    When   you   tap   a   contact   on   the   People   screen    the   contact   details     screen   opens    showing   you   the   information   stored   for   that   contact      exchanged   messages   and   phone   calls   with   that   contact    Facebook     notifications    and   more     The   contact   details   screen   has   the   following   tabs     6  1    1     2     3                   People    8    1  Details tab    Shows   the   information   you   have   stored   for   the   contact    and   allows   you     to   get   in   touch   with   the   contact   directly   by   tapping   any   of   the   displayed     methods    For   example    if   the   contact   has   a   stored   work   phone   number      tap   Call Work to   call   that   number   You   can   also   add   one   of   the   contact   s   phone   numbers   as   a   speed   dial     number    For   information    see      To   add   a   contact   to   speed   d
87.   of     people    the   camera   can   automatically   recognize   faces   and   adjust   the     focus     Face   detection   does   not   work   in   video   mode     Capturing a video    Press   HOME            tap         and   then   tap   Camcorder     Before   capturing   video    you   can   zoom   in   first   on   your   subject      See      Zooming      to   find   out   how   to   use   the   onscreen   zoom   bar     Frame   your   subject   on   the   screen     Let   the   camera   auto   focus   on   the   center   of   the   screen    or   you   can     touch   another   area   on   the   screen   that   you   want   to   focus   on     Press   the   optical   trackball   to   start   capturing   video     1     2     3     4     5     16    Camera    To   stop   capturing    press   the   optical   trackball   again     Choose   what   you   want   to   do   with   the   video   you   ve   just   captured      See      Review   screen      for   details     Camera settings    Open   the   menu   panel   to   change   basic   camera   settings   and   access     more   camera   settings    You   can   also   switch   between   photo   and   video     modes   from   the   menu   panel     Changing basic settings    On   the   Viewfinder   screen    tap       to   open   the   menu   panel     To   change   basic   camera   settings    tap   one   of   these   icons   in   the     menu   panel     Exposure    There   s   a   Brightness   bar   that   allows  
88.   off    you   can   control   the   music     playback   right   from   the   Lock   screen   when   you      wake   up      the   phone   by     pressing   POWER    If   you   do   not   see   the   playback   controls   on   the   Lock     screen    tap   anywhere   on   the   screen   to   display   the   playback   controls     Music       Press   the   VOLUME   UP   or   VOLUME   DOWN   button   to   adjust   the     playback   volume     If   you   are   using   the   wired   headset   to   listen   to   music    press   the   center     button   to   toggle   between   playing   and   pausing   playback    Press   the     previous   or   next   button   to   go   to   the   previous   or   next   song                   Browsing music in the Library    Tap        at   the   bottom left   corner   of   the   Music   application   s   Playback       screen   or   Now   playing   list   to   go   to   the   Library     In   the   Library    your   music   is   organized   into   different   categories   such   as     Albums    Artists    Genres    Composers    and   more    Select   a   category   by     tapping   one   of   the   category   tabs   at   the   bottom   of   the   screen     When   you   tap   a   song   in   a   category   to   play   it    the   Now   playing   list   is     updated   with   the   song   list   from   your   selected   category        6    Music    Creating a playlist    Personalize   your   music   experience   by   creating   music   pl
89.   on   showing   the   Lock     screen    While   the   Lock   screen   is   showing    press   MENU    and   then     tap   Decline   to   reject   and   send   the   call   to   your   voicemail        Rejecting a call and sending a text message  You   can   automatically   send   a   default   text   message   to   the   caller   and     reject   the   incoming   call        To   reject   and   send   a   message   when   you   receive   an   incoming   call      press   MENU    and   then   tap   Send message        Editing the default message  You   can   change   the   message   that   is   sent   out        Press   HOME            and   then   tap          Press   MENU    and   then   tap     settings  gt  Edit default    message     Enter   the   new   message    and   then   tap   OK                             1     2     3     66    Phone   calls    Using in call options    When   a   call   is   in   progress    use   the   buttons   onscreen   to   mute   or     unmute   the   microphone   or   to   turn   the   speakerphone   on   or   off    You     can   also   press   MENU   to   open   the   call   options   to   let   you   add   a   call      place   the   call   on   hold    mute   the   microphone    and   more     Handling multiple calls  Your   phone   notifies   you   when   you   have   another   incoming   call    and     gives   you   the   option   of   rejecting   or   accepting   the   call    If   you   are     already   on   a   call   and   a
90.   showing   the   Lock     screen    Drag   the   bar   down   to   answer   the   call                      6    Phone   calls    Muting the ringing sound without rejecting the call  Do   one   of   the   following     Press   the   VOLUME   DOWN   button     Place   the   phone   face   down   on   a   leveled   surface     If   the   phone   is   already   facing   down    the   phone   will   still   ring   when     there   are   subsequent   incoming   calls     Automatically scaling down the ring volume when picking up the  phone  You   can   set   your   phone   to   automatically   scale   down   the   ring   volume     when   you   pick   up   the   phone   to   answer   calls     Press   HOME            gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings  gt  Sound  amp  display     Scroll   down   the   screen    and   then   select   the   Quiet ring on pickup     check   box     Press   BACK                           1     2     3     Phone   calls    6    Rejecting an incoming call  Depending   upon   if   the   display   is   on   or   off    you   need   to     If   the   display   is   on    tap   Decline to   reject   and   send   the   call   to   your     voicemail     If   the   display   is   off    the   display   will   turn   on   showing   the   Lock     screen    While   the   Lock   screen   is   showing    drag   the   bar   up   to     reject   and   send   the   call   to   your   voicemail     If   the   display   is   off    the   display   will   turn 
91.   tap   Tap  here to edit contact     If   you   are   logged   in   to   your   Facebook   account   through   Facebook   for     HTC   Sense    instead   of   Me    you   will   see   you   re   the   name   you   use   in     Facebook     Enter   your   name   and   contact   details     Tap   Save     Your contacts list  The   All   tab   of   the   People   screen   shows   all   your   contacts    including     Google   contacts    Exchange   ActiveSync   contacts    Phone   contacts    and     Facebook   contacts     If   you   signed   in   to   your   Google   Account   and   Facebook   account   when     you   first   set   up   the   phone    your   contacts   from   those   accounts   will     appear   in   the   contacts   list   when   you   open   People     1     2     3     4     People    77    1       6    1     Create   a   new   contact          Tap   to   edit   your   My   contact   card          This   icon   appears   when   the   contact     Has   sent   you   a   new   text   or   email   message    or   tried   to   call   you   but   you     missed   the   call   Has   updated   his   or   her   Facebook   profile   or   has   added   photos   on   Flickr     or   Facebook   Has   upcoming   Facebook   events                               Tap   to   open   the   contact   details   screen   for   that   contact          This   appears   when   the   contact   is   a   Facebook   contact   or   you   link   the     contact   to   his   or   her   F
92.   the   word   you   want   highlighted   in   green   or   orange    you     can   simply   tap   the   space   bar   to   insert   the   word   into   your   text     If   you   see   the   word   you   want   shown   in   the   suggestions   before     you   have   finished   typing   the   entire   word    tap   the   word   to   insert   it     into   your   text     If   an   arrow   is   shown   to   the   right   of   the   suggestion   list    tap   the     arrow   to   see   more   suggestions                          Keyboard    91    Entering text with voice input  You   can   use   the   phone   s   microphone   to   input   text   vocally     On   the   onscreen   keyboard    press             When   prompted    say   what   you   want   written   clearly   into   the     microphone     Adjusting touch input settings    Open   the   Touch   Input   settings   by   doing   the   following     On   the   Home   screen    press   MENU   and   then   tap   Settings    gt      Language  amp  keyboard    gt    Touch Input        Touch Input settings    Keyboard types    Tap   to   select   the   keyboard   layout   to   use    You   can   choose   from     QWERTY    Phone   Keypad    or   Compact   QWERTY        Keyboard language    Tap   to   select   the   language   layout   of   the   keyboard     Text input    Tap   to   set   text   input   options   when   entering   text    calibrate   the     keyboard    and   set   a   sound   and or   vibration   feedback  
93.   to      Removing   the   back   cover        If   the   battery   is   installed    remove   the   battery    Refer   to      Removing     the   battery        Insert   the   microSD   card   into   the   slot   with   its   gold   contacts   facing     down   and   push   it   in   until   it   clicks   into   place     Removing the storage card    Remove   the   back   cover    Refer   to      Removing   the   back   cover        If   the   battery   is   installed    remove   the   battery    Refer   to      Removing     the   battery        Push   the   storage   card   in   to   eject   it   from   its   slot     Removing the storage card while the phone is on  When   you   need   to   remove   the   storage   card   while   the   phone   is   on      unmount   the   storage   card   first   to   prevent   corrupting   or   damaging   the     files   in   the   storage   card     Press   HOME            gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings     Scroll   down   the   screen    and   then   tap   SD card  amp  phone storage     1     2     3     1     2     3     1     2     Basics    9    Tap   Unmount SD card     Remove   the   storage   card   by   following   the   instructions   in        Removing   the   storage   card        Battery    Your   phone   comes   with   a   rechargeable   Lithium ion   polymer   or     Lithium ion   battery   and   is   designed   to   use   only   manufacturer   specified   original   batteries   and   accessories    Battery   per
94.   to   enter   that   number   or   address   directly     4     5     1     2     3            Messages    97    Tap   the        icon    and   then   select   the   contacts   to   whom   you       want   to   send   the   message    You   can   also   select   contact     groups   as   recipients    When   you   have   selected   all   the   message     recipients    tap   Done     You   can   add   a   subject   line   by   pressing   MENU   and   then   tapping   Add  subject     Tap   the   text   box   that   contains   the   text      Tap   to   compose       and     then   start   composing   your   message        Tap        to   enter   the   message   by   speaking   into   the   microphone     Press   MENU   and   then   tap   Attach     On   the   Attach   window    select   from   the   following   file   attachments     Picture    Select   Camera   to   take   a   photo   and   attach   it    or     Pictures   to   attach   a   photo   from   your   storage   card     Video    Select   Camcorder   to   capture   a   video   and   attach   it    or     Videos   to   attach   a   video   from   your   storage   card     Audio    Select   Voice Recorder   to   make   a   voice   recording   and     attach   it    or   Music  amp  sounds   to   attach   a   music   file   or   voice     recording   from   your   storage   card     Location    You   can   attach   location   information    Send   your     current   location    requires   GPS   to   be   turned   on 
95.   what   days   of   the   week   to   sound   the   alarm     and   then   tap   OK     Select   the   Vibrate   check   box   if   you   want   your   phone   to   also     vibrate   when   the   alarm   goes   off     When   you   ve   finished   setting   the   alarm    tap   Done     To   turn   off   an   alarm    tap   to   clear   the   check   box   of   the   alarm     If   you   need   to   set   more   than   three   alarms    press   MENU   while   you   re     on   the   Alarms   screen   and   then   tap   Add alarm                   Deleting an alarm    Press   HOME           and   then   tap   the   HTC   Clock   widget   on   the   Home       screen     Tap   the   Alarms   tab     On   the   Alarms   screen    press   MENU   and   then   tap   Delete     Select   the   alarms   you   want   to   delete   and   then   tap   Delete        1     2     3     4     5                          6     1     2     3     4     178    Clock   and   Weather    Changing alarm sound settings  If   you   ve   set   one   or   more   alarms    you   can   change   their   settings   such     as   the   alarm   volume    how   long   to   snooze   the   alarm    and   more     Press   HOME           and   then   tap   the   HTC   Clock   widget   on   the   Home       screen     Tap   the   Alarms   tab     On   the   Alarms   screen    press   MENU   and   then   tap   Settings    You     can   change   the   following   settings     Alarm in silent mode    This   option   
96.  Fi     settings   is   enabled    this   icon        appears   in   the   status   bar   whenever   the       phone   detects   an   available   wireless   network   within   range     The   next   time   your   phone   connects   to   a   previously   accessed   secured     wireless   network    you   will   not   be   prompted   to   enter   the   key   or   other     security   information   again    unless   you   reset   your   phone   to   its   factory     default   settings     Connecting to a Wi Fi network with EAP TLS security  You   may   need   to   install   a   network   certificate     p1    to   your     phone   before   you   can   connect   to   a   Wi Fi   network   with   EAP TLS     authentication   protocol     Save   the   certificate   file   to   the   root   folder   of   the   storage   card     Press   HOME         gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings  gt  Security     Tap   Install from SD card     Select   the   network   certificate   needed   to   connect   to   the   EAP TLS     network     Follow   the   steps   in   the   previous   section   to   connect   to   the   Wi Fi     network     Checking the wireless network status    Press   HOME         gt    MENU   and   then   tap   Settings  gt  Wireless  amp     networks     On   the   Wireless    amp    networks   screen    tap   Wi Fi settings    and   then     tap   the   wireless   network   that   the   phone   is   currently   connected   to     A   message   box   is   then   di
97.  Searching the Web and your phone using the Quick  Search Box    Press   HOME            gt    SEARCH             If   you   are   in   an   application   such   as   Mail    press   the   SEARCH            button   to   toggle   between   doing   a   search   in   the   application   only     and   searching   your   phone   and   the   Web        Enter   the   search   item   in   the   Quick   Search   Box    As   you   type      matching   items   on   your   phone   and   suggestions   from   Google   web     search   are   shown   as   a   list     The   suggested   items   that   appear   will   depend   on   the   options   that     you   have   selected   in   the   search   settings    See      Setting   Web   and     Quick   Search   Box   options      for   details        Do   one   of   the   following     If   what   you   re   searching   for   is   in   the   list   of   suggestions    tap   it     in   the   list    The   item   opens   in   the   appropriate   application     If   what   you   re   searching   for   is   not   in   the   list    tap        to   search       the   Web    The   web   browser   opens    displaying   results   of   a     Google   search   on   the   Web     4     1     2     3                   Personalizing    Making your phone truly yours    Make   your   phone   look   and   sound   just   the   way   you   want   it    Personalize     your   phone   with   a   different   wallpaper    ringtone    and   notification   sound  
98.  Tap   Accept        When   your   phone   receives   a   file   transfer   request   notification      slide   down   the   notifications   panel    and   then   tap   Accept        When   a   file   is   transferred    a   notification   is   displayed    To   open   the     file   immediately    slide   down   the   notifications   panel    and   then   tap     the   relevant   notification        1     2     3     4     5     6     7     8     9     08    Bluetooth    When   you   open   a   received   file    what   happens   next   depends   on   the   file     type     Media   files   and   documents   are   usually   opened   directly   in   a     compatible   application    For   example    if   you   open   a   music   track    it     starts   playing   in   the   Music   application     For   a   vCalendar   file    select   the   calendar   where   you   want   to   save     the   event    and   then   tap   Import    The   vCalendar   is   added   to   your     Calendar   events    For   information   on   using   Calendar    see   the     Calendar   chapter     For   a   vCard   contact   file    if   there   are   multiple   vCard   files   on   your     storage   card    you   can   choose   to   import   one    several    or   all   of     those   contacts   to   your   contacts   list     Adding the Bluetooth received folder to the Home screen  You   can   add   a   folder   to   the   Home   screen   that   shows   all   files   you   have     received   wi
99.  an email message  You   can   set   the   priority   for   an   email   message   you   send   with   your     Exchange   ActiveSync   account     While   composing   the   message    press   MENU     Tap   Set priority     Select   the   priority   for   the   message     If   you   selected   High   or   Low   priority    the   priority   appears   below   the     subject   line   of   the   message     1     2     3     4     5     6     7     1     2     3     4     1     2     3     1    Email    Composing and sending an email message    Press   HOME           and   then   tap         gt    Mail        On   the   email   account   Inbox    press   MENU   and   then   tap   Compose     Fill   in   one   or   more   recipients    You   can     Enter   email   addresses   directly   in   the   To   field    If   you   re   sending     the   email   to   several   recipients    separate   the   email   addresses     with   a   comma      As   you   enter   email   addresses    any   matching   addresses   from     your   contacts   list   are   displayed    Tap   a   match   to   enter   that     address   directly     Tap   the        icon    and   then   select   the   contacts   to   whom   you       want   to   send   the   message    You   can   also   select   contact   groups     as   recipients    or   add   contacts   from   the   company   directory     if   you   have   set   up   an   Exchange   ActiveSync   account   on   your     phone    When   you   have   s
100.  as   location   and   category     Adding the Footprints widget  Add   the   Footprints   widget   to   view   and   access   your   footprints   on   the     Home   screen    To   learn   how   to   add   widgets    refer   to      Adding   a   widget     to   your   Home   screen      in   the   Personalizing   chapter                          1   2   3                   More apps    Watching videos on YouTube    YouTube   is   an   online   video   streaming   service   that   allows   you   to   view     videos   that   have   been   uploaded   by   YouTube   members     Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  YouTube    YouTube   presents   the       videos   grouped   into   categories    such   as   Most   viewed    Most   discussed      Most   recent    and   Top   rated     You   do   not   need   a   YouTube   account   to   browse   and   view   videos      However    to   use   all   the   features   of   YouTube    such   as   sharing   a     video     you   must   create   a   YouTube   account   from   your   computer     and   sign   in   to   that   account   from   your   phone     You   must   have   an   active   Wi Fi   or   data   connection   to   access     YouTube                   Watching videos    Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  YouTube     On   the   YouTube   screen    scroll   through   the   list   of   videos    and   then     tap   a   video   to   watch   it    The   screen   automatically   switches   to     lan
101.  brightness    See      Adjusting   the   screen     brightness   manually      in   this   chapter   for   details     Switch   off   screen   animations    See      Switching   animation   effects     on   or   off      in   this   chapter   for   details    1     2     3                                 Settings    81    Cut   down   on   activities   such   as   Internet   browsing    Wireless   data     consumes   a   lot   of   power     Avoid   making   very   long   phone   calls   or   using   the   camera   for     extended   periods   of   time     Consider   carrying   a   spare   battery   for   times   when   you   can   t     charge   your   battery   for   an   extended   period     Batteries   gradually   lose   storage   capacity   over   time    Consider     replacing   your   battery   after   eight   months   to   a   year    or   if   you     notice   that   the   battery   life   is   decreasing     Checking the power usage of applications    Press   HOME            gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings     Scroll   down   the   screen    and   then   tap   About phone  gt  Battery  gt   Battery use     Managing memory    Checking how much phone memory is available for use    Press   HOME            gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings     Scroll   down   the   screen    and   then   tap   SD card  amp  phone storage      The   available   phone   memory   is   displayed   in   the   Internal   phone     storage   section     Checking the availa
102.  default    Day   view   displays   your   current   location   s   weather    You   can     change   it   to   display   the   weather   of   another   city     Sending a vCalendar    You   can   send   a   calendar   event   as   a   vCalendar   to   someone   s   phone     or   your   computer   using   Bluetooth    You   can   also   send   it   as   a   file     attachment   with   your   message     Press   HOME            tap      and   then   tap   Calendar     In   Month   view    tap   the   day   when   the   event   takes   place     Press   and   hold   the   calendar   event   you   want   to   send    and   then     tap   Share vCalendar     Choose   whether   to   send   the   event   using   Bluetooth   or   send   it   by     email     If   you   chose   to   send   using   Bluetooth    in   the   next   few   steps    you   ll     be   asked   to   turn   on   Bluetooth   on   your   phone   and   connect   to   the     receiving   Bluetooth   device   so   the   vCalendar   can   be   sent    Follow     the   steps   in      Sending   information   from   your   phone   to   another     device      in   the   Bluetooth   chapter     1     2     3     4     5     Calendar    169    If   you   chose   to   send   by   email    a   new   message   window   opens     and   automatically   includes   the   vCalendar   as   an   attachment      Your   default   email   account   that   s   selected   in   the   Mail   application     will   be   used   to   send
103.  event     In   Day    Agenda   or   Week   view    press   and   hold   an   event   and   then     tap   Delete event     When   editing   an   event    scroll   down   to   the   bottom   of   screen   and     then   tap   Delete     If   the   event   repeats    you   ll   be   asked   whether   you   want   to   delete     just   that   occurrence    this   and   all   future   occurrences    or   all   past     and   future   occurrences   in   your   Calendar     Calendar event reminders    If   you   have   set   at   least   one   reminder   for   an   event    the   upcoming   event     icon        will   appear   in   the   notifications   area   of   the   status   bar   to   remind       you   of   the   upcoming   event     Viewing  dismissing  or snoozing event reminders    1  Tap   the   status   bar    then   slide   your   finger   down   the   screen   to       open   the   Notifications   panel     2  Do   one   of   the   following     Tap   Clear   to   dismiss   event   reminders   and   all   other     notifications    Other   types   of   notifications   such   as   new     messages   and   missed   calls   will   also   be   deleted     After   sliding   open   the   Notifications   panel    tap   the   calendar     event   reminder    You   ll   then   see   a   list   of   all   pending   event     reminders    Tap   Snooze all   to   snooze   all   event   reminders   for     five   minutes    or   tap   Dismiss all   to   dismiss   all   event   
104.  for    Matching   contacts   are     displayed     If   the   list   of   matching   contacts   is   long    you   can   view   more   results   by       tapping        to   hide   the   onscreen   keyboard     Tap   the   contact   to   open   his   or   her   contact   details   screen    See        Contact   information   and   conversations      in   this   chapter   for     details     Backing up your contacts to the storage card    Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  People     Press   MENU    and   then   tap   Import Export  gt  Export to SD card     When   asked   to   confirm    tap   OK        Importing contacts from the storage card    Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  People     Press   MENU    and   then   tap   Import Export  gt  Import from SD card        1     2     3     4     1     2     3     4     1     2     3     1     2     People    81    You   can   only   import   contacts   that   were   exported   to   the   storage   card     using   the   Export to SD card   feature   on   the   phone    See      Backing   up     your   contacts   to   the   storage   card     If   you   have   Google   or   Exchange   ActiveSync   accounts   set   up   on     your   phone    tap   the   type   for   the   imported   contacts     Press   BACK        to   stop   importing   contacts   from   the   storage   card     Deleting contacts    Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  People     On   the   All   tab    press   MENU
105.  gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings    gt    Wireless  amp     networks    gt    Bluetooth settings     If   Bluetooth   is   not   switched   on    tap   the   Bluetooth   check   box   to     switch   it   on     Make   sure   that   the   headset   is   discoverable     Tap   the   headset   s   name   in   the   Bluetooth   devices   section     If   prompted   to   enter   a   passcode    try   0000   or   1    or   consult   the     headset car   kit   documentation   to   find   the   passcode     If   you   still   cannot   reconnect   to   the   headset   or   car   kit    follow   the     instructions   in      Unpairing   from   a   Bluetooth   device      in   this   chapter    and     then   follow   the   instructions   under      Connecting   a   Bluetooth   headset   or     car   kit      above     6     1     2     3     4     5     0    Bluetooth    Disconnecting or unpairing from a Bluetooth device    Disconnecting a Bluetooth device    Press   HOME         gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings    gt    Wireless  amp     networks    gt    Bluetooth settings     In   the   Bluetooth   devices   section    press   and   hold   the   device   to     disconnect     Tap   Disconnect     Unpairing from a Bluetooth device  You   can   make   your   phone   forget   its   pairing   connection   with   another     Bluetooth   device    To   connect   to   the   other   device   again    you   may   need     to   enter   or   confirm   a   passcode   again
106.  gt  Talk     In   the   Friends   list    press   MENU    and   then   tap   All friends    To   switch     back   to   just   the   friends   with   whom   you   chat   most   frequently    tap     Most popular   in   the   menu     Making a friend popular    Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  Talk     In   the   Friends   list    press   and   hold   a   friend   s   name     If   you   cannot   see   the   friend    press   MENU    and   then   tap   All friends     In   the   options   menu    tap   Always show friend     3                   1     2     3     1     2     1     2     3     1    Social    Blocking a friend  You   can   block   a   friend   from   sending   you   messages    When   blocked      your   friend   is   also   removed   from   your   Friends   list     Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  Talk        In   the   Friends   list    press   and   hold   the   friend   s   name   you   want   to     block        If   you   cannot   see   the   friend    press   MENU    and   then   tap   All friends     In   the   options   menu    tap   Block friend    Your   friend   is   removed     from   your   friends   list   and   is   added   to   the   blocked   friends   list     To   unblock   a   friend    in   the   Friends   list    press   MENU   and   then   tap     Blocked    In   the   Blocked   friends   list    tap   the   name   of   the   friend   you     want   to   unblock    and   then   tap   OK   when   prompted
107.  in   your   status   update   on   a   social   network     such   as   Twitter    See   the   Email    Messages    and   Social   chapters   for     more   information   on   using   these   features     Viewing bookmarks and previously visited pages  You   can   store   as   many   bookmarks   as   you   want   on   your   phone    You     can   also   access   a   convenient   History   list   of   the   sites   you   have   visited      or   quickly   view   the   pages   that   you   access   most   often     1     2     3     198    Internet    Bookmarking a web page    While   viewing   a   web   page    press   MENU    and   then   tap   Add  bookmark    The   New   bookmark   screen   opens     Edit   the   bookmark   name   if   needed    and   then   tap   Done     Opening a bookmark    Press   HOME          and then tap      and   then   tap      gt    Internet     Press   MENU    and   then   tap   Bookmarks     On   the   Bookmarks   tab            navigate   to   the   bookmark   you   want       to   open    and   then   tap   it     Editing a bookmark    Press   HOME          and then tap      and   then   tap      gt    Internet     Press   MENU    and   then   tap   Bookmarks     On   the   Bookmarks   tab            press   MENU   and   then   tap   Edit        Tap   the   bookmark   you   want   to   edit     Enter   your   changes    and   then   tap   Done     Viewing a previously visited page    Press   HOME          and then tap      and   then   tap
108.  later   in   your     phone   s   location   settings     On   the   Set   up   accounts   screen    choose   the   type   of   account   you     want   to   set   up   and   follow   the   onscreen   instructions   to   complete     the   setup    Tap   Skip   to   set   up   accounts   at   a   later   time        To   set   up   your   Google   Account    tap   Google account  gt  Next  gt   Sign in    enter   your   Google   Account   details    and   then   tap   Sign in     To   learn   how   to   set   up   POP   and   Microsoft   Exchange     ActiveSync   accounts    see   the   Sync   and   Email   chapters   to   learn     how   to   set   up   these   accounts        1     2     3     4     5     6                   Basics       After   setting   up   an   account    you   will   be   taken   back   to   the   Set   up     accounts   screen   so   you   can   set   up   more   accounts    When   you   are     done   setting   up   your   accounts    tap   Next     On   the   Set   up   social   networks   screen    choose   the   type   of   social     network   account   such   as   Facebook    for   HTC   Sense    and   Twitter     that   you   want   to   access   from   your   phone    Follow   the   onscreen     instructions   to   log   in   to   your   social   network   account    Tap   Skip     to   set   up   social   network   accounts   at   a   later   time    See   the   Social     chapter   for   more   information   about   Facebook   for   HTC   S
109.  law    in   no   event   shall     HTC   or   its   affiliates   be   liable   to   you    any   user    or   third   party   for   any     indirect    special    consequential    incidental   or   punitive   damages   of   any     kind    arising   in   contract    tort    or   otherwise    including    but   not   limited     to    injury    loss   of   revenue    loss   of   goodwill    loss   of   business   opportunity      loss   of   data    and or   loss   of   profits    regardless   of   the   foresee   ability     thereof   or   whether   HTC   or   its   affiliates   have   been   advised   of   the     possibility   of   such   damages    And   in   no   event   shall   the   total   liability   of     HTC   or   its   affiliates   exceed   the   amount   received   from   you    regardless     of   the   legal   theory   under   which   the   cause   of   action   is   brought    The     foregoing   does   not   affect   any   statutory   rights   which   may   not   be     disclaimed     Please   also   read   the   Safety   and   regulatory   guide   that   is   included   in     the   box   for   information   on   the   proper   usage   of   your   phone   to   prevent     injuries   and   to   avoid   damaging   your   phone    You   can   also   refer   to   this     guide   for   regulatory   information   about   your   phone     You   can   also   visit   our   support   website   at   www htc com support   to     download   the   Safety   and   regula
110.  out    Watching video  The   screen   automatically   switches   to   landscape   mode   when   you   play     a   video    Use   the   onscreen   controls   to   play    pause    or   stop   the   video     The   video   is   displayed   in   full   screen   size    You   can   tap        to   make   it       best   fit   on   the   screen   based   on   the   video   size    Tap   the   button   again   to     change   back   to   full   screen   size                   6    Photos    Viewing photos in your social networks    Using   the   Photos   application    you   can   view   your   photos   and   your     friends      photos   that   are   in   your   social   networks    Facebook   and   Flickr     only      Viewing photos on Facebook  You   need   to   be   logged   in   to   your   Facebook   account   to   view   Facebook     photos     Press   HOME            tap         and   then   tap   Photos     Tap   the   Facebook   tab     Tap   your   account   name   or   your   friend   s   account   on   the   list   to     view   the   pictures   in   the   account     You   can   view   photos   in   your   online   albums   the   same   way   as   how   you     view   photos   in   your   storage   card     Viewing photos on Flickr  You   need   to   be   logged   in   to   your   Flickr   account   to   view   Flickr   photos     Press   HOME            tap         and   then   tap   Photos     Tap   the   Flickr   tab     You   may   be   asked   to   give   aut
111.  the     bottom   of   the   screen   to   view   the   different   styles    and   then   tap     Select   to   choose   one                   3     1     2     3     4         Personalizing           You   can   also   add   widgets   that   allow   you   to   quickly   switch   on   or     off   certain   settings   of   your   phone    such   as   Wi Fi    Mobile   Network      Bluetooth    and   more    Scroll   down   the   widgets   list    tap   Settings    and     then   tap   the   widget   that   you   want     Downloading HTC widgets  A   selection   of   fun   and   useful   HTC   widgets   are   also   available   for   download     Press   HOME         Go   to   the   part   of   the   Home   screen   where   there   s       space   to   add   a   new   widget    To   find   out   how    see      Navigating   the     Home   screen      in   the   Basics   chapter   Tap        or   press   and   hold   on   the   Home   screen   to   open   the   Add       to   Home   options   menu   Tap   Widget   and   then   tap   Get more HTC widgets   Tap   to   select   a   widget   Tap   Details   to   see   a   short   description   about   the   widget    After     reading    press   BACK          When   you   re   ready   to   download   and   add   the   widget   to   your     Home   screen    tap   Download     1     2     3   4   5     6     Personalizing       Adding application icons and other shortcuts on  your Home screen    Place   application   icons   on   y
112.  the     footprint   category     Tap   the   footprint   you   want   to   revisit        Scroll   down   to   see   more   information    You   can   tap   the   information     fields   to   view   more   information   about   the   footprint    call   a   stored     phone   number    and   more     1     2     3     4         Maps   and   location      1    1     Search   for   the   address   in   Google   Maps             Open   the   web   page          Show   the   GPS   location   in   Google   Maps     Editing or deleting a footprint    Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt    Footprints     On   a   category   screen    press   and   hold   the   footprint   you   want   to     edit   or   delete    and   then   tap   Edit   or   Delete   on   the   options   menu        Exporting your footprints  You   can   back   up   footprints   by   exporting   them   to   a   storage   card    You     can   also   open   exported   footprints   files   in   other   applications   such   as     Google   Earth   on   your   PC    To   transfer   files   from   your   storage   card   to     your   computer    see      Copying   files   to   and   from   the   storage   card      in   the     Basics   chapter     1     2     Maps   and   location       Press   HOME            tap   gt    Footprints    and   then   do   any   of   the   following     To   export   all   your   footprints    on   the   All   footprints   tab            press       MENU   and   then   t
113.  the   keys   that   you   tapped        Keyboard    9    Other settings    Sound feedback    Select   to   hear   a   clicking   sound   whenever   you   tap   a   key   on   the     keyboard        Vibrate when typing    Select   to   enable   vibration   feedback   whenever   you   tap   a   key   on   the     keyboard        Finger touch precision    Calibration tool    Tap   to   re calibrate   the   keyboard   touch   accuracy    Re calibrate   the     keyboard   if   you   feel   that   the   keyboard   keys   are   not   responding     accurately   to   your   taps        Reset calibration    Tap   to   reset   the   calibration   back   to   factory   default        Messages    About Messages    Messages   lets   you   compose   and   send   text    SMS    and   multimedia     messages    MMS    to   other   mobile   phones     To   open   your   message   inbox    press   HOME            and   then   tap         gt        Messages     If   the   list   of   messages   does   not   fit   on   the   screen    you   can   scroll   down     to   view   more   messages   by   swiping   your   finger   on   the   screen   or   the     optical   trackball        1     1     Bold   text   indicates   unread   messages   in   the   thread             Tap   to   open   the   message   or   message   thread   and     read   the   text   or   view   the   picture   message     Messages    9    Sending text and multimedia messages  Send   short   text   messages    SMS    and   
114.  the   screen        Unlocking the screen  Press   the   bar   on   the   lock   screen   and   then   slide   your   finger   down   to     unlock   the   screen   or   to   answer   an   incoming   call     You   can   also   press   MENU   while   on   the   lock   screen   to   unlock   the     screen        If   you   have   set   up   a   screen   unlock   pattern    you   will   be   prompted   to     draw   the   pattern   on   the   screen   before   it   unlocks    For   more   information     on   how   to   create   and   enable   the   screen   unlock   pattern    see        Protecting   your   phone   with   a   screen   lock      in   the   Security   chapter        Basics    7    Home screen    The   Home   screen   provides   you   with   a   weather   clock   that   shows   the     time   and   weather   of   your   current   location    Tap   the   respective   item   to     open   the   associated   application     The   Home   screen   also   lets   you   add   the   items   you   want   and   need     on   the   Home   screen    Add   items   like   application   icons    shortcuts      folders    and   widgets   to   give   you   instant   access   to   information   and     applications    To   learn   how   to   personalize   your   Home   screen    see   the     Personalizing   chapter     Extended Home screen  The   Home   screen   extends   beyond   the   screen   width   to   provide   more     space   for   adding   icons    widgets    and   more
115.  whenever   you     tap   a   key    See      Text   input      below   for   details     Tutorial    Learn   how   to   use   the   onscreen   keyboard   with   this   interactive   tutorial     1     2            9    Keyboard    User Dictionary    Add    edit   or   remove   words   in   the   predictive   text   dictionary    See        Entering   words   with   predictive   text      in   this   chapter   for   more     information     Text input    QWERTY    Prediction    Select   to   enable   the   word   prediction   feature   which   provides   a   list   of     possible   words   that   reflect   the   characters   of   the   keys   you   have   tapped     as   well   as   characters   of   nearby   keys        Spell correction    Select   to   correct   typographical   errors   by   selecting   from   a   list   of     possible   words   that   reflect   the   characters   of   the   keys   you   have   tapped     as   well   as   characters   of   nearby   keys     Phone keypad  amp  compact QWERTY    Spell correction    Select   to   correct   typographical   errors   by   selecting   from   a   list   of     possible   words   that   reflect   the   characters   of   the   keys   you   have   tapped     as   well   as   characters   of   nearby   keys     Word completion    When   using   the   Compact   QWERTY   or   Phone   keypad    lets   you   select     from   a   list   of   possible   combinations   based   on   the   characters   that     appear   on  
116.  will   automatically   reset        Checking for phone system software updates manually    Press   HOME            gt    MENU    then   tap   Settings     Scroll   down   the   screen    and   then   tap   About phone  gt  System  updates     1     2     3     1     2     Update   and   reset    8    Your   phone   checks   for   system   software   updates    If   no   update   is     available   the   message      Your   system   is   currently   up   to   date       appears     Performing a hard factory reset    You   can   return   your   phone   to   its   original   state    as   it   was   when   it   left   the     factory    This   is   also   called   a   hard   reset    You   might   want   to   do   this   if   you     are   giving   your   phone   to   a   friend   or   relative   and   you   want   to   remove     all   your   data   first    or   if   your   phone   has   a   persistent   problem   that   is   not     solved   by   powering   off   the   phone   and   then   powering   it   on   again     A   factory   reset   is   a   drastic   measure    It   permanently   erases   all   your     personal   data   and   customized   settings    and   also   removes   any     programs   you   have   installed    Make   sure   that   you   have   backed   up   the     information   and   files   you   want   to   keep        If   your   phone   hangs   or   freezes    we   recommend   that   you   do   a      soft        reset   instead   of   a   hard factory
117.  you   re   viewing   it   in   full   screen    Press     MENU    tap   Rotate    and   then   select   either Rotate left   or   Rotate right     Cropping a photo    Press   HOME            tap         and   then   tap   Photos     From   the   Photos   application   s   Albums   screen    tap   an   album     Choose   whether   to   browse   photos   and   videos   in   the   album   in     filmstrip   or   grid   view    See      Browsing   in   filmstrip   or   grid   view      for     details     Press   and   hold   on   the   photo   that   you   want   to   crop     In   the   menu   that   opens    tap   Crop    A   crop   box   then   appears   on     the   photo     1     2     3     4     5     1     2     3     4     5     8    Photos    To   adjust   the   crop   box   size    press   and   hold   the   edge   of   the   box      When   directional   arrows   appear    drag   your   finger   inward   to   or     outward   to   resize   the   crop   box     To   move   the   crop   box   to   the   part   of   the   photo   that   you   want   to     crop    drag   the   crop   box   to   the   desired   position     Tap   Save   to   apply   the   changes   to   the   picture     The   cropped   picture   is   saved   in   the   storage   card   as   a   copy    The     original   picture   remains   unedited     You   can   also   crop   a   photo   while   you   re   viewing   it   in   full   screen    Press     MENU    tap   More    gt    Crop    and   foll
118.  you   to   adjust   the   brightness     level    Slide   your   finger   up   or   down   the   Brightness   bar   to   increase     or   decrease   brightness     Image properties    6     7     1     2     Camera    17    Slide   your   finger   across   each   of   the   slider   bars   to   adjust   the     contrast    saturation    and   sharpness     Effect    You   can   apply   a   special   effect   to   photos   and   videos   that   you   will     capture    Scroll   through   the   Effect   menu   and   choose   from   effects     such   as   sepia    solarize    posterize    and   more     Changing advanced settings    On   the   Viewfinder   screen    tap       to   open   the   menu   panel     Tap        in   the   menu   panel   to   display   the   Settings   menu   and       access   more   camera   settings    The   following   are   settings   that   you     can   change   from   the   Settings   menu     White balance  White   balance   enables   the   camera   to   capture   colors   more     accurately   by   adjusting   to   your   current   lighting   environment      White   balance   settings   include    Auto    Incandescent    Fluorescent      Daylight    and   Cloudy     ISO  photo mode only   You   can   choose   an   ISO   level   or   set   it   back   to   Auto    Higher   ISO     numbers   are   better   for   taking   pictures   in   low   light   conditions        Resolution  Select   a   photo   or   video   resolution   to   use   for
119.  you   turn   your   phone   on   for   the   first   time    you   are   prompted   to     select   the   language   you   would   like   to   use    You   can   also   change   the     language   on   the   fly   whenever   you   like    Changing   the   language   adjusts     the   keyboard   layout    date   and   time   formatting    and   more        The   languages   available   to   choose   from   may   depend   on   the   version   of     phone   you   have     Press   HOME            gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings  gt  Language  amp     keyboard  gt  Select locale     Tap   the   language   and   corresponding   region   you   want   to   use     Press   HOME           to   return   to   the   Home   screen    You   may   need   to       wait   briefly   as   the   new   language   is   applied   to   your   phone     Optimizing your phone   s battery life    When   you   re   on   the   go    it   s   not   always   easy   to   charge   your   phone   s     battery   as   often   as   you   d   like    Follow   these   tips   to   extend   the   time     between   charges        Turn   off   wireless   functions   such   as   Bluetooth    Wi Fi    and   data     connection   when   you   re   not   using   them    See   the   Internet   and     Bluetooth   chapters   for   details     Do   not   use   GPS   satellites   to   determine   your   GPS   location    See     the   Maps    amp    Location   chapter   for   details        Lower   the   screen  
120.  you   ve   just   taken      See      Review   screen      for   details     1     2     3     4     5     6     7     1    Camera    Camera flash doesn   t turn on     Using   the   flash   eats   up   much   battery   power    To   save   battery     power    the   camera   disables   the   flash    even   when   you   have     set   the   camera   flash   mode   to   Auto flash   or   Flash on    when     one   of   the   following   occurs     You have an incoming call    The   flash   will   be   disabled   temporarily   when   you   have   an     incoming   call    After   the   call   ends    you   ll   be   able   to   use   the     flash   again     If   you   have   set   the   flash   to   Flash on    it   turns   back   on   after     you   answer   and   end   the   call     Your phone   s battery level reaches 15  or lower    Recharge   the   battery   so   that   the   camera   can   have   enough     battery   power   to   use   the   flash     Cold weather may lower battery performance  which affects the flash    To   make   sure   the   camera   has   enough   battery   life   to   power     up   the   flash    keep   your   phone   warm    When   not   in   use    put     the   phone   inside   your   jacket   to   keep   it   warm    and   try   to     avoid   sudden   temperature   changes   that   may   affect   battery     performance     Camera    1    Face detection    When   you   re   auto   focusing   the   phone   s   camera   to   take   photos 
121.  your   current   location   s   weather    this   application   also     displays   the   weather   forecasts   of   other   cities   around   the   globe     If   you   declined   to   turn   location   service   on   during   first time   setup   of     your   phone    turn   location   service   on   in   your   phones   settings   so   that     you   ll   be   able   to   check   your   current   location   s   weather   on   the   HTC     Clock   widget    Weather   application    and   the   Weather   widget    Press     HOME            gt    MENU    tap   Settings  gt  Location    and   then   select   the   Use    wireless networks   check   box     Connect   to   the   Internet   using   your   phones   Wi Fi   or   data     connection    To   find   out   how    see   the   Internet   chapter     Press   HOME            tap      and   then   tap   Weather     On   the   Weather   screen    you   ll   first   see   your   current   location   s     weather    To   check   the   weather   in   other   cities    swipe   your   finger     up   or   down   the   screen     1     2     3     180    Clock   and   Weather    The   Weather   application   automatically   downloads   and   displays     the   latest   weather   updates    You   can   also   download   the   most     recent   weather   anytime   by   tapping          To   see   more   weather   details   on   the   Web    tap   Weather   at   the     bottom   center   of   the   Weather   screen     Adding a c
122.  your   events      meetings    and   appointments    You   can   also   set   up   your   phone   to   stay     in   sync   with   the   following   types   of   calendars     On   your   phone    sign   in   to   your   Google   Account   so   you   ll   be   able     to   sync   your   phones   Calendar   with   your   Google   Calendar   online      If   you   have   not   signed   in   to   your   Google   Account   yet    see   the     Accounts   and   sync   chapter   to   find   out   how   to   sign   in     You   can   create   multiple   Google   Calendars   only   in   Google   Calendar   on     the   Web    After   creating   them   in   Google   Calendar   on   the   Web    you   ll     be   able   to   see   them   in   the   Calendar   application   on   your   phone     For   more   information   about   creating   and   managing   multiple   Google     Calendars    visit   the   Google   website   at   the   following   URL         http   calendar google com     If   you   re   using   Microsoft   Outlook   on   your   computer    you   can   set     up   HTC   Sync   on   your   computer   to   sync   Outlook   Calendar   with     your   phones   Calendar    See      Using   HTC   Sync      for   details     If   you   have   a   Microsoft   Exchange   ActiveSync   account   and   you     have   added   it   on   your   phone    you   can   sync   your   phones   Calendar     with   your   Exchange   ActiveSync   calendar   events    See   the   Email     a
123. 0   on   your   computer   to   connect   and     sync   with   your   phone    To   see   a   complete   list   of   the   computer   and     software   requirements    you   can   check   them   in   the   HTC   Sync   software     download   page   on   the   HTC   support   website     http   www htc com www SupportViewNews   aspx dl_id 87 amp news_id 71    For   trouble free   installation    first   quit   all   running   programs   and     temporarily   exit   from   your   anti virus   program   before   you   start     installing   HTC   Sync                      Download   HTC   Sync   from   the   HTC   support   website    See        Downloading   the   latest   HTC   Sync   upgrade      for   details     Run      HTC   Sync exe      to   install   it   to   your   PC     From   your   PC    launch   HTC   Sync    and   use   the   USB   cable   to     connect   your   phone   to   the   PC    if   the   phone   is   not   connected   to     the   PC   there   will   be   a   sync   failure      On   your   phone    check   Notifications   on   the   status   bar   for   the   icon     to   confirm   if   HTC   Sync   recognizes   the   phone     The   first   time   you   synchronize   the   phone    the   Synchronization     Settings   Wizard   will   start   automatically   to   help   you   set   up   HTC     Sync     If   the   Synchronization   Settings   Wizard   does   not   start    click     Synchronize Now   on   the   HTC   Sync   screen               
124. 1     2     3     Social    17    Using Friend Stream    Streamline   your   social   network   accounts   through   Friend   Stream      Update   your   status   simultaneously    view   status   updates    and   look     through   photo   updates   from   your   Facebook    Twitter    and   other   social     network   accounts   using   Friend   Stream        Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  Friend Stream     If   you   are   not   signed   in   to   a   social   network   account    press   MENU      tap   Settings  gt  Accounts  amp  sync    and   then   tap   the   account   you     want   to   sign   in   to     Friend   Stream   opens   in   the   All Updates   tab    Slide   your   finger   on     the   bottom   row   to   go   to   the   tab   you   want     Friend Stream screen  Only   updates   from   accounts   that   you   are   signed   in   to   will   be   shown      You   can   filter   the   updates   that   show   in   Friend   Stream   by   pressing     MENU    and   then   tapping   Settings  gt  Show updates      6    1    1     2     3     18    Social    1     Depending   on   the   type    tap   to   open   Peep    post   a   Facebook   comment      look   at   the   Flickr   album    or   open   the   link   in   the   web   browser             Tap   to   enter   and   send   a   status   update             Shows   all   the   messages   from   the   social   network   accounts   that   you   are     signed   in   to             Sho
125. 110  Missed call 70  MMS 94  Mobile network connection 183  Music application 233  Music widget 239  Mute the microphone 68    N  Notification icons 40  Notification ringtone 279  Notifications panel 41    O  Onscreen keyboard 88  Optimizing your phone   s battery    life 280    P  PDF Viewer 258  Peep 123        widget    16    People 74        contact   groups    8      contact   information   and       conversations    8        People   screen    7      People   widget    86    Personalizing 49  Phone status icons 39  Photo capture 213  Photos application 221  Picasa 231  Picture message 94  Playing music 233  Playlist 236  Protecting your phone with a screen    lock 272    Q  Quickoffice 259  Quick Search Box 47    R  Rearranging or removing widgets and    icons on your Home screen 58    9    Index    Recalibrating the G sensor 278  Recording your voice 264  Rejecting a call and sending a text    message 65    Rejecting an incoming call 65  Removing the back cover 27  Renaming a scene 52  Review screen  Camera  211  Ringtone 238  Rotating and saving a photo 227    S  Scenes 50  Search 47  Searching for a contact 80  Searching your phone and the    Web 47    Sending a meeting request using    Calendar  Exchange ActiveSync  only  159    Sending a photo or video by    MMS 229    Sending a vCalendar 168  Sending contact information 81  Sending music using Bluetooth 239  Sending photos or videos by    email 229    Sending photos or videos using    Bluetooth 230    Setting a so
126. ActiveSync   account    and   then     copy   them   to   the   phone    You   need   to   have   your   Exchange   ActiveSync     account   set   up   on   your   phone     Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  People     On   the   Online directories   tab    tap   Company directory     Enter   the   name    and   then   tap          In   the   list    tap   the   name   of   the   contact   you   want   to   copy   to   your     phone     Tap   Save to People        1     2     3     4     5     6     1     2     3     4     5     People    79    Merging contact information  Merge   duplicated   contacts   on   your   phone   to   avoid   clutter   and     confusion    If   you   have   the   same   contact   appear   in   your   Phone    Google      and   Facebook   accounts    you   can   merge   the   contact   information   into     one   contact     The   phone   automatically   merges   contacts   that   it   finds   to   have   similar     data    If   you   need   to   manually   merge   contacts   or   break   the   link     between   contacts    follow   the   procedures   below     Manually merging contact information    Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  People     On   the   All   tab    tap   the   name   of   the   contact    not   the   icon   or     photo    you   want   to   merge   with   another   contact   on   your   phone     At   the   upper   right   corner   of   the   screen    tap        or         if       there   are
127. As   you   enter   characters      the   names   of   the   Twitter   users   that   match   the   characters   you   enter     will   appear    Tap   the   name   when   you   see   it        Enter   your   message    and   then   tap   Update     2     3     4     5     1     2     3     1     2     3     4     16    Social    Setting Peep options    Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  Peep     Press   MENU    and   then   tap   More  gt  Settings    You   can   set   these     options     Account settings    Sign   out   of   your   Twitter   account     General settings    Choose   whether   to   show   the   screen   name   or   the   real   name   of   the     people   you   follow     Send  amp  receive    Set   the   frequency   to   check   for   new   tweets   and   set   the   number   of     tweets   to   download     Services    Set   your   photo   hosting   site    photo   quality    location   options    and   URL     shortening   host     Notification settings    Select   when   to   be   notified   and   how   you   want   to   be   notified     Adding the Twitter widget  Add   the   Twitter   widget   to   let   you   send   and   follow   your   tweets   right     on   the   Home   screen     Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  Widget  gt  Twitter     Choose   the   widget   style    and   then   tap   Select        Drag   the   widget   to   a   blank   space   on   the   Home   screen    and   then     release     1     2     
128. OK     Rearranging or removing widgets and icons on  your Home screen    Rearrange   the   widgets   and   icons   on   your   Home   screen   to   give   room     for   adding   more   items   to   the   Home   screen    You   can   also   remove     widgets   and   icons   that   you   don   t   frequently   use     Moving a widget or icon    Press   and   hold   the   widget   or   icon   you   want   to   move     The   phone   vibrates   and   you   ll   see   a   green   box   around   the   widget     or   icon    Don   t   release   your   finger     Drag   the   widget   or   icon   to   a   new   location   on   the   screen     Pause   at   the   left   or   right   edge   of   the   screen   to   drag   the   widget     or   icon   onto   another   Home   screen   panel     When   the   widget   or   icon   is   where   you   want   it    release   your   finger     If   you   ve   released   your   finger   but   a   message   shows   that   there   s     no   space   to   place   the   widget   or   icon    drag   it   right   or   left   again   to     another   Home   screen   panel     1     2     3     1     2     3     Personalizing    9    Removing a widget or icon    Press   and   hold   the   widget   or   icon   you   want   to   remove     The   phone   vibrates   and   you   ll   see   a   green   box   around   the   widget     or   icon    Don   t   release   your   finger     Drag   the   widget   or   icon   to   the   Phone   button    The   Phon
129. Press   HOME               and   then   tap      gt  Peep     1     2     3                   1     Social    1    While   on   the   Peep   screen    press   the   SEARCH        button        Tap   the   text   field   with   the   words      Search   Twitter       enter   the   search     criteria    and   then   tap                   On   the   Search   result   screen    scroll   through   the   list    and   then   tap     the   twitter   user   you   want   to   follow        The   search   results   will   also   list   down   tweets   that   contain   the   search     word     Press   MENU    and   then   tap   Follow        Unfollowing a Twitter user    Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  Peep     On   the   All Tweets   tab    tap   Twitter   user   you   want   to   stop     following     Press   MENU    and   then   tap   Unfollow     Sending a direct message  You   can   only   send   a   direct   message   to   someone   who   is   following   you        Press   HOME               and   then   tap      gt  Peep     Press   MENU    and   then   tap   New message     You   can   also   send   a   direct   message   from   the   All Tweets   or   Direct  Message   tab    On   the   All   Tweets   or   Direct   Message   tab    press   and   hold     the   person   you   want   to   send   the   direct   message   to    and   then   tap     Send direct message   on   the   options   menu     Tap   the   To   field    and   then   enter   the   name    
130. Turning   your   data   connection   off   can   help   optimize   your   battery     life    It   can   also   save   money   on   data   charges    However    when     your   data   connection   is   turned   off    you   may   not   always   receive     automatic   updates   to   your   email    social   network   accounts    and   other     synchronized   information     Press   HOME         gt    MENU   and   then   tap   Settings  gt  Wireless  amp     networks        Select   the   Mobile network   check   box   to   turn   on   the   data     connection    clear   the   check   box   to   turn   off   the   data   connection        Enabling data roaming  Data   roaming   lets   you   connect   to   mobile   operator   s   partner   networks     and   access   data   services   when   you   are   out   of   your   mobile   operator   s     coverage   area     Press   HOME         gt    MENU   and   then   tap   Settings  gt  Wireless  amp     networks     Tap   Mobile networks   and   then   select   the   Data roaming   check     box     1     2     1     2     18    Internet    Accessing   data   services   while   roaming   may   incur   significant   charges      Inquire   about   the   data   roaming   tariffs   with   your   mobile   operator     before   enabling   data   roaming     Wi Fi    Wi Fi   provides   wireless   Internet   access   over   distances   of   up   to   00     feet    100   meters     To   use   Wi Fi   on   your   phone    you   need   acc
131. World   Clock   screen   so   you   can   instantly   check     the   date   and   time   in   these   cities    In   addition   to   the   current   and   home     cities    the   World   Clock   screen   can   display   up   to   1   cities     Press   HOME           and   then   tap   the   HTC   Clock   widget   on   the   Home       screen     Tap   the   World Clock   tab     Tap   Add city    Enter   the   city   name   you   want   to   add    As   you   enter     letters    the   list   is   filtered   to   show   matching   cities   and   countries     Scroll   through   the   matching   list   and   tap   the   city   that   you   want   to     add     Setting the alarm clock    You   can   use   the   Clock   application   s   Alarms   screen   to   set   up   one   or     more   wake up   alarms     1     2     3     4     Clock   and   Weather    177    Setting an alarm    Press   HOME           and   then   tap   the   HTC   Clock   widget   on   the   Home       screen     Tap   the   Alarms   tab     Select   the   check   box   of   an   alarm    and   then   tap   that   alarm     On   the   Set   alarm   screen    drag   your   finger   up   or   down   to   roll   the     time   scroll   wheels   and   set   the   alarm   time     Scroll   through   the   Set   alarms   screen   to   see   all   the   available   alarm     options    You   can     Enter   the   alarm   Description   and   choose   the   Alarm sound   to     use     Tap   Repeat    Select 
132. You   can   do   the   following     To   slowly   zoom   in   or   out    slide   your   finger   up   or   down   the     Viewfinder   screen    You   can   also   drag   your   finger   across   the     zoom   bar     Tap        to   zoom   in   to   the   highest   magnification     Tap        to   zoom   out   to   the   actual   size     3  After   you   re   done    wait   for   a   few   seconds   for   the   zoom   bar   to       automatically   disappear   from   the   screen    You   can   also   tap   the     Zoom   button   again   or   tap   the   Viewfinder   screen   to   hide   it                          Camera    1    Taking a photo    Press   HOME           and then tap  and   then   tap   Camera     Before   taking   the   photo    you   can   zoom   in   first   on   your   subject      See      Zooming      to   find   out   how   to   use   the   onscreen   zoom   bar     On   the   Viewfinder   screen    tap   the   Flash button   repeatedly     to   select   a   camera   flash   mode   depending   on   your   lighting     conditions         Auto   flash        Flash   on        Flash   off    Frame   your   subject   on   the   Viewfinder   screen     Let   the   camera   auto   focus   on   the   center   of   the   screen    or   you   can     touch   another   area   on   the   screen   that   you   want   to   focus   on     Press   the   optical   trackball   to   take   the   photo     Choose   what   you   want   to   do   with   the   photo  
133. Your HTC Desire    User guide           Before you do anything else  please read this    Charge the battery    The   battery   in   your   phone   hasn   t   been   charged   yet    While   your   phone     is   charging    it   s   important   that   you   do   not   remove   the   battery   pack      Doing   so   can   damage   your   phone    Also    please   don   t   try   to   take   your     phone   apart     If   you   do    it   may   invalidate   your   warranty      Choose a rate plan wisely    Your   phone   can   use   up   a   lot   of   Internet   bandwidth   really   quickly      Before   you   use   your   phone    we   strongly   recommend   that   you   talk   to     your   mobile   operator   about   data   rates    If   you   re   on   a   standard   data     plan    the   costs   could   really   add   up    Switching   to   a   flat rate   plan   could     be   a   lot   cheaper     Know about privacy laws    Some   countries   have   strict   laws   about   how   and   when   you   can   record     phone   conversations    For   example    you   may   need   to   tell   the   person     you   re   speaking   to   before   you   start   recording    It   s   a   good   idea   to   find     out   what   the   laws   are   where   you   live   before   you   use   your   phone   s     recording   feature            And finally  a few important words from our legal team  LIMITATION OF  DAMAGES     To   the   maximum   extent   permitted   by   applicable  
134. a   call     with   that   number   ends     Voice Privacy    Encrypts   outgoing   voice   calls   and   uses   secure   channels   when     available     Turning Airplane mode on or off    In   many   countries    you   are   required   by   law   to   turn   off   the   phone   while     on   board   an   aircraft    A   way   to   turn   off   the   phone   function   is   to   switch     your   phone   to   Airplane mode    When   you   enable   Airplane   mode      all   wireless   radios   on   your   phone   are   turned   off    including   the   call     function    data   services    Bluetooth    and   Wi Fi     Press   HOME         gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings  gt  Wireless  amp     networks     1     Phone   calls    7    Select   or   clear   the   Airplane mode   check   box   to   enable   or   disable     Airplane   mode         When   enabled    the   Airplane   mode   icon                is   displayed   in   the       status   bar     When   you   disable   Airplane   mode    the   call   function   is   turned   back   on     and   the   previous   state   of   Bluetooth   and   Wi Fi   is   restored     2     People    About People    In   People    you   can   easily   manage   your   communications   with   contacts     via   phone    messaging    and   email    You   can   also   view   updates   on   their     Facebook   and   Flickr   accounts     If   you   are   synchronizing   contacts   with   your   Google   account    with   your 
135. acebook   account     6     Tap   the   photo   or   icon   to   open   a   menu   where   you   can   quickly   choose   how     to   communicate   with   the   contact    Depending   on   the   contact   information     stored    you   can   call    send   a   message   or   email    see   the   contact   s   Facebook     profile    and   map   his her   address   in   Google   Maps        78    People    To   view   only   contacts   of   a   particular   type    for   example   Google     contacts   or   Facebook   contacts    press   MENU    tap   View    and   select   the     contact   types     Adding a new contact    Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  People     On   the   All   tab    tap   Add contact at   the   top   of   the   screen     Select   the   Contact type    for   example   Google   or   Microsoft  Exchange ActiveSync    This   determines   which   account   the     contact   will   sync   with    For   more   information    see      Ways   of     getting   contacts   into   your   phone      in   this   chapter     Tap   the   Name   field    enter   the   first   and   last   name   of   the   contact      and   choose   the   order   in   which   to   display   the   names    Tap   OK     Enter   the   contact   information   in   the   fields   provided     Scroll   to   the   bottom   of   the   screen    and   then   tap   Save     Importing contacts from an Exchange ActiveSync  account  Access   contacts   from   your   Exchange   
136. al   problems   when   using   your     phone            7    Contents    Basics  21    Inside   the   box                                                                                                                          1  Your   Phone                                                                                                                                  Front   panel                                                                                                                     Back   panel                                                                                                                       Top   panel                                                                                                                         Bottom   panel                                                                                                                 Left   panel                                                                                                                       6    Before   turning   on   your   phone                                                                                       7    Back   cover                                                                                                                    7  Storage   card                                                                                                              8  Battery                                                                              
137. also   tap        and    when   prompted    speak   the   name   of       the   location   you   are   searching   for    Search   results   are   instantly     displayed                   Tap            The   search   results   are   displayed   on   the   map     1    1     Tap   to   show   the   search   results   as   a   list          Tap   to   go   to   the   previous   or   next   search   item   on   the   map   if     there   are   multiple   search   results     Tap   the   balloon   to   show   the   Address    Details    if   available     and     Reviews    if   available    for   each   search   item     3     4     6    Maps   and   location    Getting directions  Use   Google   Maps   to   get   detailed   directions   to   your   destination     While   viewing   a   map    press   MENU   and   then   tap   Directions     Enter   the   starting   point   in   the   first   text   box    then   enter   your     destination   in   the   second   text   box    By   default    your   current     location   is   entered   in   the   Starting point   box      1     1     Select   starting   point             Select   destination          Choose   how   you   want   to   get   to   your   destination     You   can   also   tap        to   open   the   location   source   menu   and   select       a   starting   point   and   destination   address     Tap   the   icon   for   car    public   transit    or   walking   directions     Tap   Go    The   directions   to
138. and   end   markers    Drag   to   increase   or     decrease   the   text   selection   area     When   you   select   a   larger   block   of   text    the   appearance   of   the     markers   changes    You   can   drag   these   markers   up   or   down   to     select   multiple   paragraphs   of   text        Internet    197    Copying and pasting text    After   you   have   selected   the   text   you   want   to   copy    tap            The       selected   text   is   then   copied   to   the   clipboard     In   a   text   entry   field    for   example   while   composing   a   message       press   and   hold   at   the   point   where   you   want   to   paste   the   text     Tap   Paste        Searching or translating text    1  After   you   have   selected   the   text   you   want   to   search   or   translate        tap                2  Tap   one   of   the   following   tabs           Wikipedia    Look   for   related   information   on   Wikipedia    based     on   the   text   that   you   selected        Google Translate    Translate   the   text   to   another   language           Google Dictionary    Look   up   the   selected   text   in   the     dictionary     Pasting text in a new message or social network status update    1  After   you   have   selected   the   text   you   want   to   share    tap                2  Select   an   option   to   paste   the   selected   text   in   a   new   email    text   or       multimedia   message   or  
139. and   then   tap   Remove     1     2     3     4     1     2     3     4     5     1     2     3     4     8    Music    Deleting playlists    In   the   Library    tap   or   slide   your   finger   on   the   bottom   row   to   go   to     the   Playlists   category     Press   MENU   and   then   tap   Delete playlists        Select   the   playlists   to   delete   and   then   tap   Delete     Setting a song as ringtone    You   can   select   a   song   from   the   Music   application   s   Library   and   set   it     as   your   phone   s   ringtone   or   a   ringtone   for   a   certain   contact     Press   HOME            tap      and   then   tap   Music     Tap        at   the   bottom left   corner   of   the   screen   to   go   to   the       Library     In   the   Library    select   the   song   that   you   want   to   use   as   ringtone     and   then   play   it   back     On   the   Playback   screen    press   MENU   and   then   tap   Set as  ringtone     In   the   Set   as   ringtone   options   menu    tap   Phone ringtone   or     Contact ringtone     If   you   select   Contact ringtone    you   need   to   select   the   contacts     you   want   to   associate   the   song   within   the   next   screen     Checking if the song was added as a ringtone    On   the   Home   screen    press   MENU   and   then   tap   Settings     On   the   Settings   screen    tap   Sound    amp  display  gt  Phone ringtone      The   song   should   be   in
140. anel      Then   tap   the   status   that   shows      Select   to   change   USB   connection     type        On   the   Connect   to   PC   screen   in   your   phone     tap   HTC Sync   and     then   tap   Done     On   your   computer    double click   the   green   HTC   Sync   icon        to       open   HTC   Sync     In   HTC   Sync    click   Application Installer        In   the   Application   Installer   file   types   dialog   box    make   sure   that     the   Android OS installer file  apk    check   box   is   selected   and   then     click   OK     This   dialog   box   only   appears   the   first   time   you   use   the   Application     Installer     Click   Next     Click   Browse    locate   the   application     apk    on   your   computer    and     then   click   Open        After   selecting   the   application    click   Next        Click   Finish    Check   your   phone   s   screen   to   see   if   there   are     additional   instructions   to   complete   the   installation     2     3     4     5     6     7     8     9     10     Social    Facebook for HTC Sense and Facebook for  Android application    Facebook for HTC Sense  View   your   Facebook     updates   in   supported   applications   on   the   phone      By   signing   in   to   Facebook   for   HTC   Sense    your   Facebook   contacts     and   their   contact   details   are   downloaded   to   People    you   can   browse     through   Facebook   photo   albums   in   Pho
141. ap   Export      To   export   all   the   footprints   from   a   particular   category    while     viewing   that   category    press   MENU   and   then   tap   Export   To   export   a   single   footprint    open   the   footprint    press   MENU   and     then   tap   Export     Exported   footprints   are   saved   as    kmz   files   in   the   Footprints_Data     folder   on   your   storage   card    If   you   exported   multiple   footprints   at   one     time    they   are   saved   together   in   one    kmz   file        Importing footprints  You   can   restore   footprints   you   previously   backed   up   to   the   storage     card    You   can   also   import    kmz   files   that   you   saved   in   other     applications    or   use   a   photo   as   a   footprint     Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt    Footprints     Press   MENU    and   then   tap   Import   Do   one   of   the   following     To   import   saved   footprints   or   another    kmz   file   from   the   storage     card    tap   Footprints data    and   then   tap   the   file   you   want   to     import    If   a   footprint   on   the   device   is   the   same   as   one   you   want     to   import    you   are   asked   whether   you   want   to   overwrite   it   To   import   a   photo    tap   Picture    navigate   to   the   photo   you     want   to   import    and   then   tap   the   photo    You   can   then   add     Footprints   information   such  
142. ard   installed   on   the     phone    Basics    1    Checking notifications  Notification   icons   on   the   status   bar   report   the   arrival   of   new     messages    calendar   events    alarms   set   and   ongoing   settings   such   as     when   call   forwarding   is   on   or   the   current   call   status    You   can   open     the   Notifications   panel   to   open   the   message    reminder    or   event     notification   and   see   the   mobile   operator   name     Opening the Notifications panel  When   a   new   notification   icon   displays   in   the   status   bar    press   and     hold   the   status   bar    then   slide   your   finger   downward   to   open   the     Notifications   panel     If   you   have   several   notifications    you   can   scroll   down   the   screen   to     view   more   notifications     You   can   also   open   the   Notifications   panel   on   the   Home   screen   by     pressing   MENU   and   then   tapping   Notifications         Basics    Closing the Notifications panel  Do   one   of   the   following     Press   and   hold   the   bottom   bar   of   the   Notifications   panel    then     slide   your   finger   up   the   screen        Press   BACK          Using the optical trackball to interact with the touch screen    Besides   using   finger   gestures   on   the   touch   screen    you   can   also   use     the   optical   trackball   to   interact   with   your   phone   s   touch   scre
143. asics   chapter   to   learn   how   to   copy   files   to   the   storage   card     Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  Quickoffice     On   the   Open   file   screen    tap   the   file   you   want   to   open     In   the   Open   file   screen    press   MENU   and   then   tap   Sort to   let   you   sort   the     list   by   Name   or   Date     Slide   your   finger   on   the   screen   to   pan   or   go   through   the   pages   of     the   file                             1     2     3     60    More   apps    While   viewing   a   file    you   can     Pinch   the   screen   to   zoom   in   or   out   or   use   the   zoom   controls     on   the   screen   to   zoom   in   or   out     For   Excel   files    press   MENU    and   then   tap   Worksheet   to   view     other   worksheets   on   the   file        For   Word   and   PowerPoint   files    tap   a   URL   link   to   open   the     web   page   in   the   web   browser        When   you   open   Word   documents    Quickoffice   reformats   the     text   to   make   it   fit   the   width   of   the   screen    Double tap   the     screen   to   switch   to   normal   view   so   you   can   view   the   page     layout        Quickoffice   does   not   reflow   text   in   tables     When   you   view   PowerPoint   files    after   you   zoom   in   on   a   slide      you   can   double tap   the   screen   to   zoom   out   automatically   and     fit   the   slide   to   the
144. aylists    Make     a   playlist   containing   just   your   favorite   songs   or   create   one   to   match     your   mood   for   the   day    You   can   make   as   many   playlists   as   you   like     Press   HOME            tap      and   then   tap   Music     Tap        at   the   bottom left   corner   of   the   screen   to   go   to   the   Library     In   the   Library    tap   or   slide   your   finger   on   the   bottom   row   to   go   to     the   Playlists   category     Tap   Add playlist     Enter   a   playlist   name    and   then   tap   Add songs to playlist     Tap   or   slide   your   finger   on   the   bottom   row   to   change   among   the     different   categories    If   you   go   to   the   Songs   category    you   can   see     a   complete   list   of   songs   on   your   storage   card     Select   the   check   boxes   of   songs   you   want   to   add   to   the   playlist     and   then   tap   Add     Tap   Save     Playing the songs in a playlist    In   the   Library    tap   or   slide   your   finger   on   the   bottom   row   to   go   to     the   Playlists   category     Tap   a   playlist   to   open   it     Tap   the   first   song   or   any   song   in   the   playlist     When   you   tap   a   song   in   the   list   to   play   it    the   Now   playing   list   is     updated   with   the   song   list   from   your   playlist     Managing playlists  After   creating   a   playlist    you   can   add   
145. battery   is   being   charged   Flashing   red   light   when   the   battery   level   reaches   very   low                             8  Touch screen        Basics    Back panel    1    11    10    9    9  5 megapixel camera    10 Back cover    11  Dual LED flashlight    12 Speaker    Basics       Top panel    1  1    13 POWER    When   the   phone   is   off    press   to   turn   on   the   phone   When   the   phone   is   on   and   the   screen   is   unlocked    press   to   turn   the     phone   display   off   or   on   With   the   screen   unlocked    press   and   hold   to   open   the   phone   options     menu   that   lets   you   turn   off   the   phone    switch   your   phone   to   silent   mode      vibration   mode    or   airplane   mode    and   turn   on off   the   data   connection                        14 3 5mm audio jack    Connect   a    mm   stereo   headset   for   hands free   conversation   or   for     listening   to   music     Bottom panel    1    16    15 USB connector    Connect   the   power   adapter   to   charge   the   battery      Connect   the   supplied   USB   cable   to   transfer   files   to   your   phone   from     your   computer   or   sync   your   phone   with   HTC   Sync   on   your   computer                 16 Microphone    6    Basics    Left panel    17    18    17 VOLUME UP    While   on   a   call    press   to   increase   earpiece   volume   While   not   on   a   call    press   to   increase   the   ri
146. be   able   to     upload   pictures     Press   HOME            tap         and   then   tap   Photos     Tap   the   album   where   the   photos   you   want   to   share   are   in     Tap        and   then   on   the   Share   options   menu    tap   Facebook for    HTC Sense     Select   the   pictures   you   want   to   share   and   then   tap   Next        Select   which   album   to   upload   to   and   set   privacy   settings   for   the     uploaded   pictures    Tap   Done        1     2     3     4     5     1     2     3     4     5     Photos    1    Sharing photos on Flickr  You   need   to   be   logged   in   to   your   Flickr   account   to   be   able   to   upload     pictures     Press   HOME            tap         and   then   tap   Photos     Tap   the   album   where   the   photos   you   want   to   share   are   in     Tap        and   then   on   the   Share   options   menu    tap   Flickr     Select   the   pictures   you   want   to   share   and   then   tap   Next        Select   which   album   to   upload   to   and   set   privacy   settings   for   the     uploaded   pictures    Tap   Done     Sharing photos on Picasa  You   need   to   be   signed   in   to   a   Google   Account   to   be   able   to   upload     pictures   to   the   Picasa      photo   organizing   service        Press   HOME            tap         and   then   tap   Photos     Tap   the   album   where   the   photos   you   want   to   share   are   in     Tap 
147. bject   before   taking   the   photo     Reset to default  Tap   to   change   the   camera   back   to   default   settings     Photos    About the Photos application    Using   the   Photos   application    you   can   view   photos   and   watch   videos     that   you   ve   taken   with   your   phone   s   camera    downloaded    or   copied     onto   your   storage   card    You   can   also   take   a   look   at   your   photos   and     your   friends      photos   that   are   on   your   social   networks    Facebook   and     Flickr   only      For   photos   that   are   in   your   storage   card    you   can   do   basic   editing     such   as   rotate   and   crop    You   can   also   easily   make   a   photo   as   your     contact   picture   or   wallpaper   and   share   photos   with   your   friends     Selecting an album    To   open   the   Photos   application    press   HOME            tap         and   then       tap   Photos     The   Photos   application   opens   in   the   Albums   screen   where   your     photos   and   videos   are   organized   by   albums   for   easy   viewing         Photos    The   following   are   preset   albums     Camera shots   lets   you   view   photos   and   videos   that   are   stored   in     the   camera   s   folder     Photos and videos   that   you   set   as   your   favorites   will   be   grouped     under   My favorites     All photos   lets   you   view   all   photos   that   are   stored   i
148. ble storage card space    Press   HOME  HOME         gt  MENU  and then tap      gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings     Scroll   down   the   screen    and   then   tap   SD card  amp  phone storage      The   total   and   available   storage   card   space   is   displayed   in   the   SD  card   section                                 1     2     1     2     1     2     8    Settings    Clearing application cache and data    Press   HOME            gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings     Scroll   down   the   screen    and   then   tap   Applications  gt  Manage  applications     On   the   Manage   applications   screen    tap   the   application   whose     cache   and or   data   you   want   to   delete     Press   MENU   to   bring   up   sort   and   filter   options     In   the   Application   info   screen    tap   Clear data   and or   Clear cache     Uninstalling third party applications  You   cannot   uninstall   applications   that   are   preinstalled   on   the   phone     Press   HOME            gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings        Scroll   down   the   screen    and   then   tap   Applications  gt  Manage  applications     Press   MENU    and   then   tap   Filter  gt  Downloaded     On   the   Manage   applications   screen    tap   the   application   you   want     to   uninstall        On   the   Application   info   screen    tap   Uninstall     Freeing up more phone memory or storage card space  If   your   phone   is   runn
149. calls    Not   all   mobile   networks   support   conference   calling    Contact   your     service   provider   for   details     Muting the microphone during a call  On   the   screen    tap        to   toggle   between   turning   the   microphone   on       or   off    When   the   microphone   is   turned   off    the   Mute   icon              appears       in   the   status   bar     Turning the speakerphone on or off during a call  On   the   screen    tap     to   toggle   between   turning   the   speakerphone       on   or   off    The   Speakerphone   icon                appears   in   the   status   bar   when       the   speakerphone   is   on     To   avoid   damage   to   your   hearing    do   not   hold   your   phone   against     your   ear   when   the   speakerphone   is   turned   on     Ending a call  On   the   screen    tap   End call     If   the   phone   display   is   off    press   POWER   to   turn   on   the   screen   so   you     can   tap   End call     If   the   phone   number   of   the   person   who   called   is   not   in   your   contacts     list    you   can   choose   to   save   the   number   to   your   contacts   list   after   you     hang   up        Phone   calls    69    Using call history    When   you   miss   a   call    the   missed   call   icon                appears   in   the   title       bar    Use   the   Call history   tab   in   the   People   application   to   check   who     the   caller   was   or   vie
150. ccept   the   new   call    you   can   choose   to   switch     between   the   two   callers     Phone   calls    67    When   you   receive   another   call    tap   Answer   to   accept   the   second     call    and   to   put   the   first   call   on   hold     To   switch   between   callers    tap   the   person   you   want   to   talk   to   on     the   screen     To   end   the   current   call   and   return   to   the   other   call    tap   End call     Setting up a conference call    Make   a   call   to   the   first   participant     When   connected    press   MENU    tap   Add call    dial   the   number   of     the   second   participant    and   then   tap   Call    The   first   participant   is     put   on   hold   when   you   dial   the   second   participant     When   connected   to   the   second   participant    tap         merge      To   add   another   participant   to   the   conference   call    tap         and       then   dial   the   number   of   the   contact   you   want   to   invite   to   the     conference   call     The   conference   call   is   put   on   hold   when   you   call   another   contact      When   you   are   connected   to   the   other   contact    you   can   talk   to   that     party   in   private     When   connected    tap        to   add   the   participant   to   the   conference       call        When   finished    tap   End call     1     2     3     1     2     3     4     5     6     68    Phone   
151. ccepting an invitation to become a friend  When   a   contact   invites   you   to   become   a   friend   in   Google   Talk    you     receive   a   notification   in   the   Status   bar   and   the   invitation   appears   in     your   Friends   list     Press   HOME               and   then   tap      gt  Talk     In   the   Friends   list    tap   Chat invitation     3     1     2     3     4     5     1     2     3     1     2     Social    1    Do   one   of   the   following     Tap   Accept   in   the   menu   that   opens   to   accept   the   invitation     Tap   Cancel   if   you   don   t   want   to   chat   with   and   share   your     Google   Talk   status   with   the   sender     Viewing the list of pending invitations to friends    Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  Talk     In   the   Friends   list    press   MENU    and   then   tap   Invites    All   the   friends     to   whom   you   ve   extended   invitations   to   become   friends   on   Google     Talk   appear   in   the   list   until   they   accept   or   cancel   your   invitation     Tap   a   pending   invitation    and   then   tap   Accept   or   Decline     Viewing all friends or only those most popular with you  By   default    only   the   friends   that   you   frequently   chat   with         the   most     popular         are   shown   in   the   Friends   list    But   you   can   view   all   friends     instead     Press   HOME            and   then   tap     
152. ch   as   the   name    email     address    password    and   description     General settings  Set   the   font   size   when   reading   emails    enable    disable   or   set   the     signature    set   the   account   as   the   default   email   account    and   set     where   to   save   email   attachments        Send  amp  receive  Set   the   maximum   email   file   size   limit   when   receiving   and     frequency   to   check   for   new   emails   and   how   many   to   check   for      You   can   also   set   to   have   emails   that   you   send   bcc   d   to   yourself        Notification settings  Set   email   notification   settings        Delete account  Tap   to   delete   the   email   account     Press   BACK        to   save   your   changes     1     2     3     4     5     Email    1    Deleting an email account    Press   HOME           and   then   tap         gt    Mail        Switch   to   the   email   account   you   want   to   delete     Press   MENU    and   then   tap   More  gt  Settings  gt  Delete account        Adding the Mail widget  Add   the   Mail   widget   to   let   you   view   your   POP IMAP   or   Exchange     ActiveSync   emails   on   the   Home   screen    To   learn   how   to   add   widgets      refer   to      Adding   a   widget   to   your   Home   screen      in   the   Personalizing     chapter     1     2     3     Calendar    About Calendar    Use   your   phones   Calendar   to   create   and   manage  
153. ck   start   guide    Safety   and   regulatory   guide                                                                Basics    Your Phone    Front panel     8     1    7    6      1  Earpiece    Listen   to   a   phone   call   from   here     2  MENU    Press   to   open   a   list   of   actions   that   you   can   do   on   the   current   screen     Basics       3  HOME    While   on   any   application   or   screen    press   to   return   to   the   Home     screen   While   on   the   main   Home   screen    press   to   show   a   snapshot   of   the     extended   Home   screens      Press   and   hold   to   open   the   recently used   applications   window                          4  SEARCH    Press   to   open   the   Quick   Search   box   See      Searching   your   phone   and   the   Web      in   this   chapter   for   more   details     5  BACK    Press   to   go   back   to   the   previous   screen    or   to   close   a   dialog   box    options     menu    the   Notifications   panel    or   onscreen   keyboard     6  Optical trackball    Swipe   your   finger   over   or   press   to   highlight   or   select   items   onscreen     7  Notification LED    This   LED   shows   a     Solid   green   light   when   the   phone   is   connected   to   the   power   adapter     or   a   computer   and   the   battery   is   fully   charged   Flashing   green   light   when   you   have   a   pending   notification      Solid   red   light   when   the   
154. color    that   means   your     phone   has   successfully   connected   with   your   computer   and   HTC     Sync   recognizes   your   phone     6     1     2     3     4     5     6     Accounts   and   sync    11    Setting up synchronization  You   can   set   up   HTC   Sync   to   synchronize   your   computer   s   Outlook     contacts   and   calendar   events   with   your   phone    If   you   re   using   Outlook     Express   on   your   computer    you   can   only   sync   contacts   with   your     phone     Before   you   begin   setting   up   synchronization    make   sure   you   have   set   up     HTC   Sync   to   recognize   your   phone    If   you   have   not   yet   done   so    follow     the   steps   in      Setting   up   HTC   Sync   to   recognize   your   phone        On   your   computer    check   and   make   sure   the   HTC   Sync   icon            at   the   bottom right   side   of   the   screen   appears   in   green   which     means   that   your   phone   is   connected   to   HTC   Sync     Double click   the   green   HTC   Sync   icon   on   your   computer   to   open     HTC   Sync     Click   Synchronize Now     You   can   also   click   Sync Manager  gt   Settings         In   the   Synchronization   Settings   Wizard    click   Next     In   the   next   few   dialog   boxes    choose   whether   to   sync   Outlook   or     Outlook   Express    select   the   type   of   information   to   sync    contacts     and or
155. d   then   tap   Scenes     In   the   Choose   a   scene   menu    select   a   preset   scene   and   then   tap     Done     1     2     Personalizing    1    Default  Work  Play    Customizing and saving a scene  After   selecting   a   preset   scene    you   can   add   widgets   and   other     elements    arrange   the   layout    change   the   wallpaper    and   save   the     whole   Home   screen   as   your   personalized   scene     Press   HOME         gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Scenes     In   the   Choose   a   scene   menu    select   a   preset   scene   that   already     has   some   widgets    or   select   Clean Slate   if   you   want   to   design     your   own   Home   screen     Add   widgets   and   other   elements   that   you   want     Arrange   the   layout   of   your   Home   screen   according   to   your     preference     Change   the   Home   screen   wallpaper    You   can   also   change   the     lock   screen   wallpaper     When   you   are   done   designing   your   Home   screen    press   HOME           gt    MENU   and   then   tap   Scenes   again     1     2     3     4     5     6         Personalizing    Under   My scenes    make   sure   the   Current  unsaved    option   is     selected   and   then   tap   Save        Enter   a   new   scene   name   for   your   Home   screen   and   then   tap     Done    Or    if   you   already   created   a   scene    enter   the   same   scene     name    tap   Done   and   
156. dscape   view   when   you   play   a   video     While   watching   a   video    you   can        Tap   the   screen   to   display   the   playback   controls    When   the     playback   controls   are   displayed    you   can   pause    skip   forward     or   backward    or   drag   the   slider   to   the   point   in   the   video   you     want   to   watch     1     2     3            More   apps    7    Press   MENU   to   rank    comment   on    share    flag   as   inappropriate      and   interact   with   the   video   in   other   ways     Press   BACK        to   stop   playback    and   return   to   the   videos   list     Searching for videos    Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  YouTube        On   the   YouTube   screen    press   SEARCH          Enter   a   search   keyword    and   then   tap          Tap        to   enter   a   search   keyword   by   speaking   into   the   microphone     The   number   of   search   results   appears   below   the   status   bar    Scroll     through   the   results   and   tap   a   video   to   watch   it     Clearing the search history    Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  YouTube     Press   MENU   and   then   tap   Settings        Tap   Clear search history    and   then   tap   OK   when   prompted     Sharing a video link  You   can   share   a   video   by   sending   its   link   to   your   contacts     Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  YouTube     On   the   Y
157. e      you   can   switch   between   accounts   in   Gmail Google   Mail    For   more     information   on   setting   up   Google   Accounts    see      Synchronizing   with   a     Google   Account      in   the   Accounts   and   sync   chapter     While   viewing   the   Inbox    deselect   any   checked   email   messages     Press   MENU    and   then   tap   Accounts     Tap   the   account   to   switch   to     Reading your messages  Depending   on   your   notification   settings    the   phone   plays   a   ringtone      vibrates    or   displays   the   email   message   briefly   in   the   status   bar   when     you   receive   a   new   email    A   new   email   message   icon        also   appears       on   the   notifications   area   of   the   status   bar   to   notify   you   of   a   new   email      For   more   information   on   email   notification   settings    refer   to      Changing     Gmail Google   Mail   settings      later   in   this   chapter     For   information   on   automatic   email   synchronization    see      Changing     Gmail Google   Mail   synchronization   settings      in   this   chapter     To   refresh   your   inbox   manually    press   MENU   and   then   tap   Refresh     1  Do   one   of   the   following     When   you   receive   a   new   email   notification    press   and   hold   the     status   bar    and   then   slide   your   finger   down   on   the   screen   to     open   the   Notifications   pane
158. e   button     then   changes   into   the   Remove   button   and   turns   red     When   the   widget   or   icon   also   turns   red    release   your   finger            1     2     3     Phone calls    Making calls    There   are   several   convenient   methods   to   make   a   call   from   your   phone     Calling somebody using your phone  You   can   either   dial   a   number   directly    or   you   can   use   the   Smart   Dial      see   Smart   Dial    feature   to   search   and   call   a   contact   in   your   contacts     lit   or   a   number   from   call   history     Press   HOME            and   then   tap          Begin   entering   the   first   few   digits   or   characters   by   tapping   the     keys   on   the   phone   keypad    As   you   enter   digits   or   letters    the     panel   displays   numbers   and   names   that   match   the   keys   you     tapped     If   you   enter   a   wrong   digit    tap     to   erase   that   digit    To   erase   the       entire   number    press   and   hold          Tap        to   close   the   phone   keypad   and   to   see   if   there   are   more       matching   numbers   or   contacts    To   browse   through   the   filtered     list    flick   through   the   list   or   slide   your   finger   up   or   down   the   list     slowly     To   place   a   call    do   one   of   the   following     If   there   are   no   matching   contacts   in   the   list    after   entering   the
159. e   name     comes   up   in   the   list    tap   the   name        On   the   Speed   dial   screen    select   the   phone   number   of   the     contact   to   use    and   the   phone   keypad   assignment    Tap   Save            1     2     1     2     3     4     6    Phone   calls    Calling a phone number in a text message    Press   HOME            tap   Messages    and   then   tap   the   message   with       the   phone   number        In   the   message   thread    tap   the   message   with   the   phone   number     On   the   Select link   screen    tap   the   number   you   want   to   call     Edit   the   phone   number   if   needed    and   then   tap   Call        To   call   the   message   sender    in   the   All   messages   list    press   and   hold     the   message    and   then   tap   Call   on   the   options   menu        For   more   information   about   text   messages    see   the   Messages   chapter     Calling a phone number in an email    Press   HOME            and   then   tap   Mail        Open   the   email   account   where   the   email   with   the   number   is     located     In   the   email   account   s   inbox    tap   the   email   to   open   it     In   the   email   body    tap   the   phone   number    The   phone   dialer   screen     opens   with   the   phone   number   already   entered     The   phone   will   recognize   a   number   as   a   phone   number   if   the   number     has   a   minimum   of    
160. e Maps    Google Maps   lets   you   track   your   current   location    view   real time   traffic     situations    and   receive   detailed   directions   to   your   destination    It   also     provides   a   search   tool   where   you   can   locate   places   of   interest   or   an     address   on   a   vector   or   aerial   map    or   view   locations   in   street   level     You   need   an   active   mobile   data   or   Wi Fi   connection   to   use   Google     Maps     The   Google   Maps   application   does   not   cover   every   country   or   city                   Viewing locations    Turning on location services  Before   you   open   Google   Maps   and   find   your   location   or   search   for     places   of   interest    you   must   enable   location   sources     Press   HOME         gt    MENU   and   then   tap   Settings    gt    Location     Select   Use wireless networks    Use GPS satellites    or   both     Selecting   Use GPS satellites   lets   you   locate   places   of   interest   at   street     level    However    this   requires   a   clear   view   of   the   sky   and   more   battery     power     1     2     Maps   and   location    1    Finding your location    Press   HOME         and   then   tap   gt    Maps     On   the   Google   Maps   screen    press   MENU   and   then   tap   My  Location    Your   location   is   shown   on   the   map   as   a   blinking   blue   dot     Moving on the map  Swipe   your   finge
161. ect   the     contacts   you   want   to   add    and   then   tap   Save    For   more   information   on     contact   groups    see      Contact   groups      in   the   People   chapter     Unread    Displays   unread   messages     Marked  Exchange ActiveSync only     Displays   all   flagged   messages     Meeting invitations  Exchange ActiveSync only     Displays   meeting   invitations   which   you   have   not   yet   accepted   or     declined     Attachments    Displays   all   messages   that   have   attachments     10    Email    Refreshing an email account  Whatever   your   automatic   synchronization   settings   are    you   can   also     synchronize   your   sent   and   received   emails   manually   at   any   time     While   in   the   account   you   want   to   synchronize    press   MENU    and   then     tap   Refresh     Sorting email messages    On   the   email   account   Inbox    press   MENU    and   then   tap   Sort     Select   from   the   options   to   sort   email   messages   by   date   received      priority    subject    sender    or   size        Deleting an email message    On   the   email   account   Inbox    press   and   hold   the   message   you     want   to   delete     On   the   options   menu    tap   Delete        Deleting multiple email messages    On   the   email   account   Inbox    press   MENU   and   then   tap   Delete     Select   the   messages   you   want   to   delete    and   then   tap   Delete     Exc
162. eld    enter   the   email   addresses   of   everyone   you     want   to   invite   to   the   event    Separate   multiple   addresses   with     commas                 If   the   people   to   whom   you   send   invitations   use   Google   Calendar      they   ll   receive   an   invitation   in   Calendar   and   by   email     Tap   Save   to   add   the   event   to   your   Google   Calendar     1     2     3     4     Calendar    19    Sending a meeting request using Calendar  Exchange  ActiveSync only   If   you   have   an   Exchange   ActiveSync   account   set   up   on   your   phone      you   can   use   Calendar   to   create   a   meeting   appointment   and   send     a   meeting   request   email   to   the   people   you   want   to   invite   to   your     meeting     Open   Calendar   and   create   a   new   event    Tap   the   Calendar   field     and   then   select   Exchange    For   the   steps    see      Creating   a   calendar     event        Add   details   about   the   meeting    such   as   date   and   time    location      and   more     Press   MENU   and   then   tap   Meeting Invitation     Tap        and   choose   attendees   from   your   contacts   or   Company       Directory     Enter   your   message   and   then   tap   Send     Tap   Save   to   add   the   meeting   appointment   to   your   Exchange     ActiveSync   Calendar     Changing calendar views    When   you   open   Calendar    it   displays   the   Month   view
163. elected   all   the   message   recipients    tap     Done     If   you   want   to   send   a   carbon   copy    Cc    or   a   blind   carbon   copy    Bcc      of   the   email   to   other   recipients    press   MENU    and   then   tap   Show  Cc Bcc     Enter   the   subject    and   then   compose   your   message        To   add   an   attachment    press   MENU    tap   Add attachment    and     choose   from   the   following   options     Picture    Select   Camera   to   take   a   photo   and   attach   it    or     Pictures   to   attach   a   photo   from   your   storage   card     Video    Select   Camcorder   to   capture   a   video   and   attach   it    or     Videos   to   attach   a   video   from   your   storage   card     1     2     3                   4     5                   Email    1    Audio    Select   Voice Recorder   to   make   a   voice   recording   and     attach   it    or   Files   to   attach   a   music   file   or   voice   recording   from     your   storage   card     Location    You   can   attach   location   information    Send   your     current   location    requires   GPS   to   be   turned   on     a   location     stored   in   Footprints    or   a   location   you   pick   on   a   map    For   more     information   about   GPS    maps    and   Footprints    see   the   Maps     and   location   chapter        Document    Attach   a   PDF   file   or   an   Office   document   such   as   a     text   file   or   a   s
164. en     Be   sure   to   place   your   finger   over   the   optical   trackball   first    covering   it     completely     and   then   slide   your   finger   across   the   optical   trackball     Going to an extended Home screen    To   go   to   the   extended   Home   screen   on   the   right    slide   your   finger   to     the   right    Slide   your   finger   to   the   left   to   go   to   the   extended   Home     screen   on   the   left     Selecting an item onscreen    For   most   screens    slide   your   finger   to   the     left    right    up    or   down    depending   on   the     direction   you   want   to   go    For   example    if   you     want   to   select    highlight    an   item   above      slide   your   finger   upward    Press   the   optical     trackball   to   open   the   item                   Basics       Selecting a tab    For   screens   that   have   tabs   at   the   bottom      slide   your   finger   to   the   left   or   right   to   go   to   a     tab     Moving the cursor when entering text  To   go   back   or   forward   one   character   in   a   word    slide   your   finger   left   or     right    Slide   your   finger   up   or   down   to   go   up   or   down   between   lines   of     text     Selecting a link on a webpage    1    Slide   your   finger   down   to   go   to   the   next       link   on   a   webpage            When   a   link   is   selected    press   the   optical       trackball   to   op
165. en   tap   Weather     On   the   Weather   screen    press   MENU   and   then   tap   Settings     You   can   change   the   following   weather   settings     Select   or   clear   the   Update automatically check   box      depending   on   whether   you   want   your   phone   to   automatically     download   weather   updates     To   set   an   auto   update   schedule    tap   Update frequency   and     choose   a   schedule     Tap   Temperature scale   to   choose   whether   to   display   weather     in   Celsius   or   Fahrenheit        1     2     3     4     1     2     3     1     2     3                          18    Clock   and   Weather    About the Weather widget    Use   the   Weather   widget   to   instantly   check   weather   forecasts   of   your     current   location   and   other   cities   without   having   to   open   the   Weather     application     The   Weather   widget   comes   in   different   looks   and   styles    You   can   add     this   widget   to   the   Home   screen    if   it   s   not   yet   added    To   find   out   how     you   can   add   a   widget    see      Personalizing   your   Home   screen   with     widgets      in   the   Personalizing   chapter     Internet    Data connection    Your   phone   will   be   automatically   configured   to   use   your   mobile     operator   s   data   connection   when   you   turn   on   your   phone   for   the   first     time     Turning the data connection on or off  
166. en   the   link         Basics    Adjusting the volume    Adjusting   the   ringer   volume   changes   the   volume   level   of   the   phone     ringtone    whereas   adjusting   the   media   volume   changes   the   volume     level   of   sound   notifications    music   or   video   playback    The   ringer     volume   and   media   volume   can   be   separately   adjusted     Adjusting the ringer volume    Press   the   VOLUME   UP   or   VOLUME   DOWN   buttons   on   the   left     panel   of   the   phone   to   adjust   the   ringer   volume   to   your   desired     level    The   Ringer   volume   window   appears   on   the   screen   to     display   the   volume   levels    While   in   the   lowest   ringer   volume   level      Silent   mode     press   VOLUME   DOWN   once   to   set   your   phone   to     Vibrate   mode    The   phone   vibrates   and   the   vibrate   mode   icon                     appears   on   the   status   bar     While   in   Vibrate   mode    press   VOLUME   UP   once   to   switch   to   silent     mode    The   speaker   mute   icon                displays   on   the   status   bar     To   quickly   switch   your   phone   to   silent   mode    press   and   hold   the     POWER   button    and   then   tap   Silent mode   on   the   options   menu     Adjusting the media volume  When   playing   music   or   watching   video    press   the   VOLUME   UP   or     VOLUME   DOWN   buttons   on   the   left   panel   of   the
167. endar folder to sync with    Change   this   only   if   you   have   personal   folders   created   in   your     Outlook   and   you   need   to   sync   with   a   personal   folder    Click     Contacts   or   Calendar on   the   left   side   of   the   dialog   box    click   the     Properties   button    and   then   choose   the   personal   folder   to   sync     with     Calendar events to sync with    Choose   the   number   of   days   of   calendar   events   to   sync    Click     Calendar   on   the   left   side   of   the   dialog   box    click   Properties    and     then   set   the   days   under   Date range     1     2     3     4     5     Accounts   and   sync    117    Conflict policy    In   cases   when   the   same   contacts   and or   calendar   items   exist   in     both   your   phone   and   your   computer    choose   whose   data   you     want   to   keep   when   a   conflict   occurs     When to sync    Click   Automatic sync   on   the   left   side   of   the   dialog   box    Then     choose   whether   to   sync   manually    auto   sync   every   time   you     connect   your   phone   to   your   computer    or   sync   at   a   set   schedule     Click   Apply   to   save   the   sync   options   you   ve   selected    and   then     click   OK     Synchronizing your phone  After   you   ve   installed   and   set   up   HTC   Sync    you   can   sync   your   phone     with   your   computer     Synchronizing your phone with yo
168. ense     When   you   are   done   setting   up   your   accounts    tap   Next   on   the     Set   up   social   networks   screen     Sleep mode  Sleep   mode   suspends   your   phone   to   a   low   power   state   while   the     display   is   off   in   order   to   save   battery   power    You   will   still   be   able   to     receive   messages   and   calls   while   the   phone   is   in   Sleep   mode     For   information   on   how   to   adjust   the   time   before   the   screen   turns   off      see      Adjusting   the   time   before   the   screen   turns   off      in   the   Settings     chapter     Switching to Sleep mode  Briefly   press   the   POWER   button   to   turn   off   the   display   temporarily     and   switch   your   phone   to   Sleep   mode    Your   phone   also   automatically     goes   into   Sleep   mode   when   you   leave   the   phone   idle   after   a   certain     period   of   time    Switching   to   Sleep   mode   also   prevents   accidental     button   or   touch   screen   presses   when   the   phone   is   in   your   bag   or     pocket     Waking up from Sleep mode  Your   phone   wakes   up   automatically   when   you   have   an   incoming   call      To   wake   up   your   phone   manually    press   the   POWER   button    You   will       7     6    Basics    then   see   that   the   phone   has   locked   the   screen    To   find   out   how   to     unlock   the   screen    see      Unlocking  
169. er 45    Copying files to and from the storage    card 46    Creating a calendar event 157  Creating a playlist 236  Cropping a photo 227  Customizing and saving a scene 51    D  Data connection 183  Date and time 175  Deleting a scene 52  Deleting contacts 81  Desk Clock 172  Downloading HTC widgets 54    E  Editing a contact   s information 80  Email 136        adding   a   POP IMAP   account    17      deleting    19    10      sending    11    1      sending   photos   or   videos    9      settings    16    1    Ending a call 68  Event reminders 164  Exchange ActiveSync 110  Extended Home screen 37    F  Facebook        sharing   photos    0    Facebook for Android 121  Facebook for HTC Sense 120  Factory reset 285  Finger gestures 31  Flash  camera  213  Flickr 231  Folders 56  Footprints 252  Friend Stream 127        Friend   Stream   widget    18    G  Gmail Google Mail 136  Google Accounts 109  Google Maps 240  GPS satellites 240    H  Hard reset 285  Home city 174  Home page 190  Home screen 37  Home screen wallpaper 52  HTC Clock widget 170  HTC Sync 112    I  Importing contacts from the storage    card 80    Internet 183    Index    91    Inviting guests to your event  Google    Account only  158    K  Keyboard 88    L  Library  Music  235  Location sources 240    M  Mail 147  Making an emergency call 63  Making Calls 60  Managing memory 281  Maps 240  Meeting request 151  159  Memory 287  Merging contact information 79  Messages 94  Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync 
170. ess   to   a     wireless   access   point   or      hotspot        The   availability   and   range   of   the   Wi Fi   signal   depends   on   the   number      infrastructure    and   other   objects   through   which   the   signal   passes     Turning Wi Fi on and connecting to a wireless network    Press   HOME         gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings  gt  Wireless    controls     Select   the   Wi Fi   check   box   to   turn   Wi Fi   on    The   phone   will   scan     for   available   wireless   networks     Tap   Wi Fi settings    The   network   names   and   security   settings   of     detected   Wi Fi   networks   are   displayed   in   the   Wi Fi   networks     section     Tap   a   Wi Fi   network   to   connect    If   you   selected   an   open   network      you   will   be   automatically   connected   to   the   network    If   you     selected   a   network   that   is   secured   with   WEP    enter   the   key   and     then   tap   Connect     Depending   on   the   network   type   and   its   security   settings    you     may   also   need   to   enter   more   information   or   choose   a   security     certificate     1     2     3     4     Internet    18    When   your   phone   is   connected   to   a   wireless   network    the   Wi Fi   icon            appears   in   the   status   bar   and   tells   you   the   approximate   signal   strength      number   of   bands   that   light   up     If   Network notification   in   Wi
171. et   to   your   Home     screen      in   the   Personalizing   chapter     Connecting to a virtual private network  VPN     From   your   phone    you   can   add    set   up    and   manage   virtual   private     networks    VPNs    that   allow   you   to   connect   and   access   resources     inside   a   secured   local   network    such   as   your   corporate   network     Preparing your phone for VPN connection  Depending   on   the   type   of   VPN   you   are   using   at   work    you   may     be   required   to   enter   your   login   credentials   and or   install   security     certificates   before   you   can   connect   to   your   company   s   local   network      You   can   get   this   information   from   your   network   administrator        Also    your   phone   must   first   establish   a   Wi Fi   or   data   connection     before   you   can   initiate   a   VPN   connection    For   information   about     setting   up   and   using   these   connections   on   your   phone    see      Data     connection      and      Wi Fi      in   this   chapter     188    Internet    Setting up secure credential storage  If   your   network   administrator   instructs   you   to   download   and   install     security   certificates    you   must   first   set   up   the   phones   secure   credential     storage     Press   HOME         gt    MENU    tap   Settings    gt    Security    and   then   tap       Set password     Enter   a   new   passwo
172. ewing and editing an event    1  Press   HOME            then   tap      and   then   tap   Calendar     2  In   Month   view    tap   the   day   when   the   event   takes   place    and   then       tap   the   event   to   open   it     The   Event   details   screen   then   opens   and   shows   the   summary   of     the   event     3  When   viewing   the   event   summary    you   can   do   the   following     Find   the   event   s   location   in   Maps     If   it   s   a   Google   Calendar   or   Exchange   ActiveSync   calendar     event    check   the   participants   of   the   event     Change   the   reminder   time     If   it   s   a   Google   Calendar   event    respond   whether   you   ll   attend     the   event     Press   the   BACK        button   on   your   phone   to   save   changes       you   made   on   the   Event   details   screen     4  To   edit   more   details   about   the   event    press   MENU   while   you   re   on       the   Event   details   screen   and   then   tap   Edit event     5  Make   your   changes   to   the   event     6  When   you   re   done   editing    scroll   down   to   the   bottom   of   the       screen   and   then   tap   Save     Deleting an event  There   are   a   number   of   ways   to   delete   an   event                                        16    Calendar    While   viewing   the   summary   of   an   event   on   the   Event   details     screen    press   MENU   and   then   tap   Delete
173. formance     depends   on   many   factors    including   network   configuration    signal     strength    the   temperature   of   the   environment   in   which   you   operate     your   phone    the   features   and or   settings   you   select   and   use    items     attached   to   connecting   ports    and   your   voice    data    and   other   program     usage   patterns     Inserting the battery    Remove   the   back   cover    Refer   to      Removing   the   back   cover        Insert   the   contacts   side   of   the   battery   first   and   then   gently   push     the   battery   into   place     Removing the battery    Remove   the   back   cover    Refer   to      Removing   the   back   cover        Lift   out   the   battery   from   the   notch   near   the   Storage   card   slot     3     4     1     2     1     2     0    Basics    Charging the battery    The   battery   is   partially   charged   when   shipped    Before   you   turn   on     and   start   using   your   phone    it   is   recommended   that   you   charge     the   battery    Some   batteries   perform   best   after   several   full   charge   discharge   cycles     1  Attach   the   power   plug   to   the   AC   adapter     2  Connect   one   end   of   the   USB   cable   to   the   sync   connector   on   your       phone     3  Connect   the   other   end   of   the   USB   cable   to   the   USB   port   of   the       AC   adapter     4  Plug   the   AC   adapter   into 
174. frame   for   the   event    tap   the   From   and   To   date     and   time   to   set   them     If   it   is   a   special   occasion   such   as   a   birthday   or   a   whole day   event      set   the   From   and   To   date    then   select   the   All day check   box                                               18    Calendar    6  Enter   the   event   location   and   description     7  Set   the   reminder   time     You   can   add   another   reminder   time   in   a   Google   Calendar   event    Press     MENU   and   then   tap   Add reminder     8  If   the   event   occurs   on   a   regular   basis    tap   the   Repetition   box   and       then   choose   how   often   the   event   occurs     9  Scroll   to   the   bottom   of   the   screen   and   then   tap   Save     Inviting guests to your event  Google Account only   If   you   want   to   invite   guests   to   your   event    you   need   to   create   and   add     the   event   in   your   Google   Calendar    An   invitation   email   will   be   sent   to     your   guests   using   your   Google   Account     Open   Calendar   and   create   a   new   event    Tap   the   Calendar   field     and   then   select   your   Google   Account    or   one   of   your   other     Google   Calendars     For   the   steps    see      Creating   a   calendar     event        Add   details   about   the   event    such   as   date   and   time    location    and     more     In   the   Guests   fi
175. ge   arrives     Adding the Messages widget    Add   the   Messages   widget   to   let   you   read   your   messages   on   the   Home     screen    To   learn   how   to   add   widgets    refer   to      Adding   a   widget   to   your     Home   screen      in   the   Personalizing   chapter     Accounts and sync    Synchronizing with online accounts    Your   phone   can   sync   information   and   receive   updates   from   your     Google      and   Microsoft     Exchange   ActiveSync     accounts   as   well   as     popular   online   services   such   as   Facebook      Twitter       and   Flickr           These   are   some   of   the   types   of   information   you   can   sync     Gmail    Google   Mail   and   Exchange   ActiveSync   email     Google   and   Exchange   ActiveSync   contacts    as   well   as   your     Facebook   friends      contact   information    For   information   on     contacts    see   the   People   chapter     Calendar   events   from   your   primary   Google   Account   and   from     Exchange   ActiveSync    For   information   on   using   Calendar    see   the     Calendar   chapter     Status   updates   and   links   shared   by   your   friends   and   yourself   on     social   networks   such   as   Facebook   and   Twitter    For   details    see     the   Social   chapter     Flickr   and   Facebook   photo   uploads    For   information   on   viewing     photos    see   the   Photos   chapter     Adding a social netwo
176. ge   mode   allows   the   camera   to   measure   light   in   the     whole   image     Review duration  Set   the   time   for   a   captured   photo   or   video   to   be   displayed   on   the     Review   screen   before   the   camera   changes   back   to   the   Viewfinder     screen     Flicker adjustment  When   taking   indoor   shots   under   fluorescent   lighting    keep   this     setting   on   Auto   or   change   it   to   the   proper   frequency    0Hz   or     60Hz    of   the   power   in   your   country   to   reduce   flicker     Auto Focus  This   option   enables   or   disables   centered   auto   focus    Auto   focus     is   enabled   by   default     Face detection  photo mode only     This   option   allows   the   camera   to   recognize   faces   and     automatically   adjust   the   focus    Face   detection   will   be   turned   off   if     you   disable   Auto   Focus     Shutter sound  Select   or   clear   this   check   box    depending   on   whether   you   want     the   camera   to   play   a   shutter   sound   when   you   press   the   shutter     release     Time stamp  photo mode only   Select   this   check   box   when   you   want   the   date   and   time   to   be     added   on   captured   photos            0    Camera    Grid  photo mode only   Select   this   check   box   when   you   want   to   display   a   grid   on   the     Viewfinder   screen   so   you   can   easily   frame   and   center   your     su
177. gle   Talk     Signing in to Google Talk  If   you   signed   in   to   your   Google   Account   when   you   first   set   up   the     phone    you   are   already   signed   in   to   Google   Talk        Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  Talk  gt  Next  gt  Sign in     Enter   your   Google   Account   username   and   password    and   then     tap   Sign in     When   you   are   signed   in   to   Google   Talk    your   online   status   in   Google     Talk   will   also   appear   in   other   Google   Apps   such   as   Gmail Google   Mail     and   Google   Maps     Signing out of Google Talk  If   you   are   not   going   to   use   Google   Talk   for   an   extended   period   of     time    we   recommend   that   you   sign   out   of   Google   Talk   to   save   battery     power        Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  Talk     In   the   Friends   list    press   MENU    and   then   tap   More  gt  Sign out        Chatting with friends    Starting a chat    Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  Talk     Tap   a   friend   in   the   Friends   list     Chat   with   your   friend   by   entering   text   in   the   text   box   at   the     bottom   of   the   screen     1     2     1     2     1     2     3     10    Social    To   insert   a   smiley    press   MENU    and   then   tap   More  gt  Insert smiley    Tap     a   smiley   to   insert   it   into   your   message     After   entering   your   mes
178. hange   position   on   the   screen     after   every   few   minutes    To   light   up   the   screen   again    tap   anywhere   on   the     screen   or   press   the   BACK        button   on   your   phone     You   can   change   the   Desk   Clock   screen   to   display   the   date   and   time   of     another   time   zone    To   find   out   how   to   select   a   different   time   zone    see        Setting   the   time   zone    date    and   time        17    Clock   and   Weather    Using World Clock    Use   the   Clock   application   s   World   Clock   screen   to   check   the   current     time   in   several   places   around   the   globe   simultaneously    You   can     also   set   your   home   city    add   more   cities   to   the   world   clock   list    and     manually   set   your   time   zone    date    and   time     Setting your home city    Press   HOME           and   then   tap   the   HTC   Clock   widget   on   the   Home       screen     Tap   the   World Clock   tab     Press   MENU   and   then   tap   Home settings     Enter   your   home   city   s   name    As   you   enter   letters    the   list   is     filtered   to   show   matching   cities   and   countries     Scroll   through   the   list   and   tap   your   home   city     1     2     3     4     5     Clock   and   Weather    17    Setting the time zone  date  and time  To   set   the   time   zone    date    and   time   on   your   phone   manually    you   
179. hange   the   view      For   example    if   you   are   in   Thumbnails   view   and   you   want   to   view     bookmarks   in   a   grid    press   MENU    gt    List    and   then   press   MENU    gt      Grid     Setting browser options  Customize   the   web   browser   to   suit   your   browsing   lifestyle    Set   display      privacy    and   security   options   when   using   the   web   browser     Press   HOME          and then tap      and   then   tap      gt    Internet     Press   MENU    and   then   tap   More  gt  Settings        1     2     3     1     2     3     1     2     3     1     2     00    Internet    Using your phone as a modem  tethering     Get   online   with   your   notebook   or   desktop   computer   at   any   time    using     your   phone   s   data   connection    For   information   on   setting   up   and   using     the   data   connection    see      Data   connection      earlier   in   this   chapter     You   need   to   install   HTC   Sync   before   you   can   use   your   phone   as   a     modem    Refer   to      Using   HTC   Sync      in   the   Sync   chapter   for   details     Make   sure   your   phone   s   data   connection   is   turned   on    See        Turning   the   data   connection   on   or   off      earlier   in   this   chapter   to     learn   how   to   turn   on   the   phone   s   data   connection     Connect   the   phone   to   the   computer   using   the   provided   USB     cable     O
180. hange ActiveSync email  If   you   synchronize   your   phone   with   your   work   Exchange   ActiveSync     account    you   can   read    manage    and   send   email   in   the   same   easy   way     as   with   a   POP IMAP   account    However    you   can   also   access   some     powerful   Exchange   features     For   information   on   setting   up   an   Exchange   ActiveSync   account    see        Synchronizing   with   a   Microsoft   Exchange   ActiveSync   account      in   the     Accounts   and   sync   chapter     1     2     1     2     1     2     Email    11    Setting out of the office status  You   can   set   your   Out   of   Office   status   and   auto reply   message   right     from   your   phone     Press   HOME           and   then   tap         gt    Mail        Switch   to   the   Exchange   ActiveSync   account     Press   MENU   and   then   tap   More  gt  Out of the office     Tap   the   field   below   I am currently    and   then   select   Out of the  office     Set   the   dates   and   times   for   the   period   when   you   will   be   out   of     the   office     Enter   the   auto reply   message     Tap   Save     Sending a meeting request    Press   HOME           and   then   tap         gt    Mail        Switch   to   the   Exchange   ActiveSync   account     Press   MENU   and   then   tap   More  gt  New meeting invitation        Enter   the   meeting   details    and   then   tap   Send     Setting the priority for
181. hanging display settings    Adjusting the screen brightness manually    Press   HOME            gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings  gt  Sound  amp  display     Scroll   down   the   screen    and   then   tap   Brightness        Clear   the   Automatic brightness   check   box        Drag   the   brightness   slider   to   the   left   to   decrease   or   to   the   right     to   increase   the   screen   brightness    Tap   OK     Adjusting the time before the screen turns off  After   a   period   of   inactivity    the   phone   screen   turns   off   to   conserve     battery   power    You   can   set   the   idle   time   before   the   screen   turns   off     Press   HOME            gt    MENU    then   tap   Settings  gt  Sound    amp  display     Scroll   down   the   screen    and   then   tap   Screen timeout        Tap   the   time   before   the   screen   turns   off     To   quickly   turn   off   the   screen    press   the   POWER   button     Preventing automatic screen rotation  By   default    the   screen   orientation   automatically   adjusts   depending   on     how   you   hold   the   phone        Not   all   application   screens   support   automatic   rotation     Press   HOME            gt    MENU    then   tap   Settings  gt  Sound  amp  display        Scroll   down   the   screen    and   then   clear   the   Orientation   check   box     1     2     3     4     1     2     3     1     2     78    Settings    Recalibrating the G senso
182. he             button     A   new   browser   window   opens   and   goes   to   the   home   page   that   is   set     1     2     19    Internet    Switching between browser windows    While   viewing   a   web   page    press   MENU   and   then   tap   Windows     Select   the   browser   window   you   want   to   view   by   sliding   your     finger   on   the   screen   from   right   to   left     1     1     Tap   to   close   the   web   page        2     Tap   to   display   the   web   page   in   full   screen     Finding text within a web page    While   viewing   a   web   page    press   MENU   and   then   tap   More  gt  Find  on page     Enter   the   search   item    As   you   enter   characters    matching     characters   will   be   highlighted    Tap   the   left   or   right   arrow   to   go   to     the   previous   or   next   matching   item     1     2     1     2     Internet    19    Downloading applications from the web  Before   you   can   download   applications   from   the   web    you   must   first     enable   downloading   from   the   phone   settings     Press   HOME         gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings    gt    Applications     Select   the   Unknown sources   check   box     When   the   Attention   dialog   box   opens    tap   OK     All   downloaded   applications   are   saved   to   the   storage   card    Before     you   download   an   application   from   the   web    make   sure   that   you   have     in
183. he   Wireless   Fidelity   Alliance    Inc     microSD   is   a   trademark   of   SD   Card   Association     Java    JME   and   all   other   Java based   marks   are   trademarks   or     registered   trademarks   of   Sun   Microsystems    Inc    in   the   United   States     and   other   countries     Facebook   is   a   trademark   of   Facebook    Inc     Twitter   is   a   trademark   of   Twitter    Inc     and   is   used   under   license     Flickr   is   a   trademark   of   Yahoo    Inc            Licensed   by   QUALCOMM   Incorporated   under   one   or   more   of   the     following   patents      901 07    90 16    06 109    0 77    101 01    778 8    06 86      109 90    11 07    8 0     9    710 78    67 61     196      67 6    68 8    7 8    69 69    600 7    1 796      67 0    16 797    All   other   company    product   and   service   names   mentioned   herein   are     trademarks    registered   trademarks   or   service   marks   of   their   respective     owners     HTC   shall   not   be   liable   for   technical   or   editorial   errors   or   omissions     contained   herein    nor   for   incidental   or   consequential   damages     resulting   from   furnishing   this   material    The   information   is   provided        as   is      without   warranty   of   any   kind   and   is   subject   to   change   without     notice    HTC   also   reserves   the   right   to   revise   the   content   of   this     document   at   any   time
184. he   same   label     When   viewing   your   Inbox   or   another   conversation   list    press     MENU    and   then   touch   View labels     Touch   a   label   to   view   a   list   of   conversations   with   that   label     The   conversation   list   resembles   your   Inbox    but   the   label   replaces        Inbox      in   the   title   bar    You   work   with   labeled   conversations   lists   in   the     same   way   as   with   your   Inbox     Changing Gmail Google Mail synchronization settings    Press   HOME           and   then   tap         gt    Gmail Google Mail        Press   MENU    and   then   tap   Settings    gt    Labels     To   set   the   number   of   days   to   synchronize    tap   Number of days to  sync                   1     2     1     2     1     2     3     Email    1    To   set   synchronization   for   a   particular   label    tap   the   label    You     can   select   to   synchronize   the   default   number   of   days    or   you   can     sync   all   or   none   of   the   label   s   messages     Working with conversations in batches  You   can   archive    label    delete    or   perform   other   actions   on   a   batch     of   conversations   at   once    in   your   Inbox   or   in   another   labeled   list   of     conversations     In   the   Inbox   or   other   conversation   list    select   the   check   boxes   for     the   conversations   you   want   to   work   with   as   a   batch    When   you
185. horization   for   the   application   to     connect   to   the   Flickr   website    If   this   happens    you   need   to   give     authorization   to   access   your   Flickr   account     Tap   your   account   name   or   your   friend   s   account   on   the   list   to     view   the   photos   in   the   account     You   can   view   photos   in   your   online   albums   the   same   way   as   how   you     view   photos   in   your   storage   card     1     2     3     1     2     3     Photos    7    Working with photos    Whether   you   re   browsing   photos   in   filmstrip   or   grid   view   in   the   Photos     application    you   can   press   and   hold   on   a   photo   to   open   a   selection     menu   and   choose   what   to   do   with   it    You   can   choose   to   delete   the     photo    rotate   or   crop   it    and   more     Rotating and saving a photo    Press   HOME            tap         and   then   tap   Photos     From   the   Photos   application   s   Albums   screen    tap   an   album     Choose   whether   to   browse   photos   and   videos   in   the   album   in     filmstrip   or   grid   view    See      Browsing   in   filmstrip   or   grid   view      for     details     Press   and   hold   on   the   photo   that   you   want   to   rotate     In   the   menu   that   opens    tap   Rotate    and   then   select   either Rotate  left   or   Rotate right        You   can   also   rotate   a   photo   while  
186. ial      in   this     chapter     2  Messages tab    Shows   your   exchanged   SMS   messages   with   the   contact    Tap   a   message     to   view   it    To   send   a   new   message    tap   New message    For   more     information   about   messages    see   the   Messages   chapter     3  Mail tab    Shows   email   messages   you   have   received   from   the   contact    Tap   an   email     message   to   view   it    To   send   a   new   email   message    tap   New mail    For     more   information   about   email    see   the   Email   chapter     4  Updates and events tab    Shows   the   contact   s   Facebook   status    updates    and   events    and   shows     when   he   or   she   uploads   new   photos   to   Flickr    When   there   is   a   notification     of   the   contact   s   birthday    you   can   tap   the   notification   to   call   the   contact     directly   or   send   a   message   greeting   You   need   to   be   logged   in   to   your   Facebook   account   to   see   the   updates     and   events    If   you   are   not   logged   in    tap   Link to Facebook        5  Photos tab    Shows   the   contact   s   Facebook   and   Flickr   photo   albums    Tap   an   album   to     look   at   the   photos   in   the   album      You   need   to   be   logged   in   to   your   Facebook   and   Flickr   accounts   to   see     the   photo   albums    If   you   are   not   logged   in    tap   Link to Facebook   and or     L
187. ighted   in   green    drag   it   to   its   new   position      and   then   release     Tap   Done        Deleting stock quotes and indices    Press   HOME            and   then   tap   gt  Stocks        Press   MENU    and   then   tap   Delete        Select   the   items   you   want   to   delete   and   then   tap   Delete        Setting stock information update frequency    Press   HOME            and   then   tap   gt  Stocks        Press   MENU    and   then   tap   Settings        1     2     3     4     1     2     3     4     1     2     3     1     2     More   apps    6    Select   the Auto sync data   check   box        Downloading   stock   information   automatically   may   incur   additional     fees   from   your   mobile   operator     Tap   Set download frequency    and   then   select   frequency   to   check     for   updates        Manually updating stock information    Press   HOME            and   then   tap   gt  Stocks        Press   MENU    and   then   tap   Update        Adding the Stocks widget    Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  Widget  gt  Stocks     Choose   the   widget   style    and   then   tap   Select        Drag   the   widget   to   a   blank   space   on   the   Home   screen    and   then     release     3     4     1     2     1     2     3     6    More   apps    Recording your voice    Voice Recorder is   useful   for   quickly   recording   thoughts    You   can   also     record   your   voice   and   set   
188. in   the   text   box    and   then   tap   OK     6     1     2     Email    1    You   can   create   a   signature   consisting   of   multiple   lines   of   text    At   the     end   of   each   line   of   text    tap        on   the   onscreen   keyboard   to   create       another   line     Viewing your sent messages    In   the   Inbox    press   MENU   and   then   tap   View labels  gt  Sent     Managing conversations and messages    Searching for messages  You   can   search   for   messages   that   contain   one   or   more   words   in   their     contents   or   in   their   addresses    subjects    labels    and   so   on    When     you   search   for   messages    all   of   the   messages   in   your   Gmail Google     Mail   account   on   the   web   are   included    except   those   labeled   Trash   or     Spam     not   just   those   that   you   ve   synchronized   onto   your   phone     In   the   Inbox    press   SEARCH          Enter   the   word   or   words   to   search   for     Tap            or   tap   the   Enter   key   on   the   onscreen   keyboard     A   conversation   list   opens    displaying   all   of   the   conversations   with     messages   that   contain   the   words   you   searched   for    The   words     you   searched   for   are   displayed   in   the   title   bar    You   work   with   the     conversations   in   this   list   just   as   you   would   with   the   conversations   in     your   Inbox   or   any
189. information                                                                         80  Searching   for   a   contact                                                                                         80  Backing   up   your   contacts   to   the   storage   card                                          80  Importing   contacts   from   the   storage   card                                                  80  Deleting   contacts                                                                                                       81  Sending   contact   information   as   a   vCard   via   MMS                                     81  Sending   your   contact   information   as   a   vCard   via   MMS                         8    Contact   groups                                                                                                                     8    Creating   a   group   and   adding   contacts                                                           8  Deleting   a   group                                                                                                        8  Adding   or   removing   contacts   from   a   group                                                8  Sending   an   SMS MMS   message   or   email   to   a   group                               8    Contact   information   and   conversations                                                                    8  People   widget                                                       
190. ing   low   on   memory    try   the   following     In   your   web   browser    clear   all   temporary   Internet   files   and   history     information    See   the   Internet   chapter   for   more   information     Uninstall   downloaded   programs   from   Android   Market   you   no     longer   use    See      Finding   and   Installing   Apps   from   Android   Market           in   the   More   apps   chapter   for   details     1     2     3     4     1     2     3     4     5                   Settings    8    Checking information about your phone    Press   HOME            gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings     Scroll   down   the   screen    and   then   tap   About phone        Select   one   of   the   following     System updates    Tap   to   check   for   software   updates   for   your   phone     Network    Check   information   about   your   mobile   operator   and   its   service   status     Phone identity    Check   information   about   your   phone     Battery    Check   information   about   the   battery   such   as   its   current   battery   level      status    and   what   programs   are   using   the   battery     Hardware information    Check   the   Wi Fi   MAC   and   Bluetooth   addresses     Software information    Check   the   version   and   other   information   about   the   Android   platform     being   used   by   the   phone    You   can   also   check   the   version   of   the   web     browser        Legal informati
191. ink to Flickr        6  Call history tab    Lists   all   your   incoming    outgoing    and   missed   calls   to   and   from   the     contact    Tap   a   list   item   to   call   the   contact   using   the   displayed   number     86    People    People widget    Put   the   group   of   people   you   contact   most   right   on   the   Home   screen     of   your   phone   by   adding   them   as   the   People   widget    Using   the   People     widget    you   can   instantly   place   a   call    send   a   message    or   view   details     of   a   favorite   contact   with   a   single   tap     Adding the People widget  Slide   your   finger   left   or   right   on   the   Home   screen   to   find   the   People     widget    If   you   do   not   find   the   People   widget   on   the   Home   screen      follow   this   procedure   to   add   the   widget   to   the   Home   screen     Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  Widget  gt  People     Choose   the   widget   style    and   then   tap   Select        Select   the   group   you   want   to   add   as   a   widget     Drag   the   widget   to   a   blank   space   on   a   Home   screen    and   then     release     Setting the default communication method    Press   HOME            and   then   go   to   the   People   widget     Tap   a   contact   on   the   widget     On   the   Select   default   action   screen    tap   the   communication     method   you   want   for   the   c
192. ions                                                                                 181    About   the   Weather   widget                                                                                            18    Internet  183    Data   connection                                                                                                                  18    Turning   the   data   connection   on   or   off                                                          18  Enabling   data   roaming                                                                                          18    Wi Fi                                                                                                                                         18    Turning   Wi Fi   on   and   connecting   to   a   wireless   network                     18  Connecting   to   a   Wi Fi   network   with   EAP TLS   security                       18  Checking   the   wireless   network   status                                                           18        1    Connecting   to   another   Wi Fi   network                                                          186    Adding   the   Data   connection   and   Wi Fi   widgets                                                186  Connecting   to   a   virtual   private   network    VPN                                                    187    Preparing   your   phone   for   VPN   connection                                                 187  Adding 
193. is   selected   by   default    which   allows   the   alarm   to     sound   even   when   your   phones   volume   is   set   to   silent   mode    Clear     this   check   box   if   you   want   to   silence   the   alarm   when   the   volume     is   in   silent   mode     Alarm volume    Set   the   volume   level   that   you   want   for   the   alarm     Snooze duration    Set   how   long   to   snooze   between   alarms     Side button behavior    Choose   what   happens   to   the   alarm   when   pressing   the   side     button    VOLUME   UP DOWN    of   your   phone    You   can   set   the     button   to   snooze    dismiss   the   alarm    or   disable   the   button     The   side   button   works   only   when   the   phones   screen   is   not     locked    While   on   the   lock   screen    tap   the   onscreen   Snooze   button     to   snooze    or   slide   down   the   screen   to   dismiss   the   alarm     1     2     3     Clock   and   Weather    179    Checking weather    If   you   consented   to   turn   location   service   on   when   you   were   setting     up   your   phone   for   the   first   time    you   ll   see   the   weather   of   your   current     location   right   on   the   HTC   Clock   widget   of   your   Home   screen     You   can   also   use   the   Weather   application   to   check   the   current     weather   and   weather   forecasts   for   the   next   four   days   of   the   week      In   addition   to  
194. it   as   a   ringtone        You   need   to   have   a   microSD   card   installed   on   your   phone   to   use   Voice     Recorder     Recording your voice    Press   HOME            and   then   tap   gt  Voice Recorder        Hold   the   device   s   microphone   near   your   mouth     Tap        to   start   recording   a   voice   clip    Tap        to   stop       recording     Tap        to   play   back   the   voice   recording     To   quickly   share   the   voice   recording   through   Bluetooth    email    or     message    tap             Sharing a voice clip    Press   HOME            and   then   tap   gt  Voice Recorder        On   the   Voice   Recorder   screen    tap             On   the   All   recording   screen    press   and   hold   the   voice   recording     you   want   to   share    and   then   tap   Share   on   the   options   menu     On   the   Share   options   menu    select   how   you   want   to   share   the     voice   recording        To   learn   how   to   send   files   through   Bluetooth    see   the   Bluetooth     chapter        Setting a voice clip as a ringtone    Press   HOME            and   then   tap   gt  Voice Recorder        1     2     3     4     5     1     2     3     4     1     More   apps    6    On   the   Voice   Recorder   screen    tap             On   the   All   recording   screen    press   and   hold   the   voice   recording     you   want   to   set   as   a   ringtone    and   then   tap   Se
195. ity to the Weather screen  Add   more   cities   to   the   Weather   screen   so   you   can   instantly   check   the     weather   forecasts   in   these   cities    In   addition   to   your   current   location      the   Weather   screen   can   display   up   to   1   cities     Press   HOME            tap      and   then   tap   Weather     On   the Weather   screen    tap          Enter   the   location   you   want   to   add   on   the   text   field    As   you   enter     text    the   list   is   filtered   to   show   the   possible   locations   based   on     the   letters   you   entered     Tap   the   desired   city   to   select   it     4     5     1     2     3     4     Clock   and   Weather    181    Changing the order of cities on the Weather screen    Press   HOME            tap         and   then   tap   Weather     On   the   Weather   screen    press   MENU   and   then   tap   Rearrange        Press   and   hold        at   the   end   of   the   item   you   want   to   move        When   the   row   is   highlighted   in   green    drag   it   to   its   new   position      then   release     Tap   Done     Deleting cities from the Weather screen    Press   HOME            tap         and   then   tap   Weather     On   the   Weather   screen    press   MENU   and   then   tap   Delete        Select   the   cities   you   want   to   remove   and   then   tap   Delete     Changing weather options    Press   HOME            tap         and   th
196. l    Tap   the   new   email   to   view   it     While   in   the   Inbox    tap   the   unread   email   or   the   conversation     with   the   unread   email   to   view   it     2  To   scroll   through   the   messages   in   the   conversation    swipe   your       finger   up down   on   the   screen   or   the   optical   trackball     1     2     3                   Email    19     1    1     Message   subject             Message   label             Online   status    Appears   when   the   contact   is   a   Google     Talk   friend   and   you   are   signed   in   to   Google   Talk     3  To   manage   the   email   message   or   conversation    do   any   of   the       following     Tap   Archive   to   remove   the   conversation   from   your   Inbox   while     still   keeping   it   stored   in   your   Google   Account     To   display   your   archived   messages    in   the   Inbox    press   MENU   and     then   tap   View labels  gt  All Mail     Tap   Delete   to   delete   the   conversation   from   your   Google     Account    If   you   delete   the   conversation   accidentally    you   can   tap     Undo   in   the   yellow   bar   at   the   top   of   the   screen   to   undelete   it     Tap   Older   to   see   the   previous   conversation   in   your   Inbox     Press   MENU   to   see   more   options                                 10    Email    Replying to or forwarding an email message    In   the   message   thread    scroll   do
197. lected   location     Clearing the map  After   you   get   directions   or   search   on   a   map    as   described   in   the   other     parts   of   this   section     you   can   clear   away   the   various   markers   such     activities   draw   on   the   map     When   viewing   a   map    press   MENU   and   then   touch   More    gt    Clear map                   Maps   and   location       Viewing map layers  Initially    Google   Maps   opens   with   a   street   map    You   can   view   additional     map   layers    such   as   satellite   images    traffic   information    your   Google     Latitude   friends      locations    and   Wikipedia   information   on   locations      You   can   also   view   maps   that   you   and   other   people   have   created   in     Google   Maps   on   the   web     Multiple   layers   can   be   viewed   at   the   same   time     Not   all   locations   have   information   to   support   all   Map   layers   or   all     zoom   levels    To   learn   more   about   layers    visit   Google   Maps   on   the     web    http   maps google com                   While   viewing   a   map    press   MENU    and   then   tap   Layers     Select   any   of   the   following     Traffic    available   only   in   selected   areas     Real time   traffic     conditions   are   displayed   over   roads   as   color coded   lines    Each     color   represents   how   fast   the   traffic   is   moving     Satellite    Google
198. lk        In   the   Friends   list    press   MENU    and   then   tap   More  gt  Settings     Select   the   Mobile indicator   option        Indicates that the friend is  using an Android phone     Setting whether you sign into Google Talk automatically  You   can   sign   in   to   your   Google   Talk   account   automatically   every   time     you   turn   on   your   phone     Press   HOME            and   then   tap         gt  Talk     In   the   Friends   list    press   MENU    and   tap   More  gt  Settings     Select   the   Automatically sign in   check   box            1     2     3     1     2     3     Email    Using Gmail Google Mail    Gmail Google Mail   is   Google   s   web based   email   service    Gmail Google     Mail   is   configured   when   you   first   set   up   your   phone    Depending   on     your   synchronization   settings    Gmail Google   Mail   on   your   phone   is     automatically   synchronized   with   one   or   more   Gmail Google   Mail     accounts   on   the   web    For   more   information   about   synchronization      see      Synchronizing   with   a   Google   Account      in   the   Accounts   and   sync     chapter     Viewing your Gmail Google Mail inbox  The   Inbox   conversations   list   is   your   default   Gmail Google   Mail   view    All     your   received   email   messages   are   delivered   to   your   Inbox     Gmail Google   Mail   groups   each   message   you   send   with   all   the     respo
199. mbs        The   Orientation   check   box   in   HOME   gt  MENU  gt  Settings  gt     Sound  amp  display   needs   to   be   selected   for   the   screen   orientation   to     automatically   change     The   landscape   orientation   keyboard   is   not   supported   in   all     applications                   Keyboard    89    Changing the onscreen keyboard layout  You   can   choose   from   three   different   keyboard   layouts   to   suit   your     typing   style    To   change   the   keyboard   layout    do   the   following     On   the   Home   screen    press   MENU   and   then   tap   Settings    gt      Language  amp  keyboard    gt    Touch Input     Tap   Keyboard types    and   then   select   the   keyboard   layout   that     you   want   to   use    Choose   from   the   following     QWERTY    This   layout   is   similar   to   a   desktop   computer     keyboard    This   is   the   default   keyboard   layout     Phone Keypad    This   layout   resembles   the   traditional   mobile     phone   keypad     Compact QWERTY    This   layout   features   two   letters   on   each     key    The   key   size   is   slightly   bigger   than   on   the   Full   QWERTY     layout     Entering text  Use   the   following   keys   while   entering   text   using   the   onscreen     keyboard     Press   and   hold   keys   with   gray   characters   at   the   top   to   enter   numbers      symbols    or   accented   letters    The   gray   character   dis
200. more   songs   to   it    rearrange   their     order    and   more     1     2     3     4     5     6     7     8     1     2     3     Music    7    Adding more songs to a playlist    In   the   Library    tap   or   slide   your   finger   on   the   bottom   row   to   go   to     the   Playlists   category     Tap   a   playlist   to   open   it     Press   MENU   and   then   tap   Add songs     Go   to   the   Songs   category   or   any   other   category        5  Select   the   songs   you   want   to   add   to   the   playlist   and   then   tap   Add     While   playing   back   a   song    press   MENU   and   then   tap   Add to playlist     to   add   the   current   song   to   a   playlist     Rearranging songs in a playlist    In   the   Library    tap   or   slide   your   finger   on   the   bottom   row   to   go   to     the   Playlists   category     Tap   a   playlist   to   open   it     Press   MENU   and   then   tap   Change order     Press   and   hold        at   the   end   of   the   song   title   you   want   to   move        When   the   row   is   highlighted    drag   it   to   its   new   position    then     release     Tap   Done     Deleting songs from a playlist    In   the   Library    tap   or   slide   your   finger   on   the   bottom   row   to   go   to     the   Playlists   category     Tap   a   playlist   to   open   it     Press   MENU   and   then   tap   Remove songs     Select   the   songs   you   want   to   delete   
201. multimedia   messages    MMS      to   other   mobile   phones    If   you   exceed   the   limit   on   the   number   of     characters   for   a   single   text   message    your   text   message   will   be     delivered   as   one   but   will   be   billed   as   more   than   one   message    These     are   called   concatenated   messages     Multimedia   messages   can   contain   text   and   a   picture    a   recorded   voice      an   audio   or   video   file    a   picture   slideshow    contact   card    vCard     or     appointment    vCalendar      The   Messages   application   automatically   converts   a   text   message   into     a   multimedia   message   when   you   enter   an   email   address   in   the   To     field    add   a   message   subject    attach   an   item    or   compose   a   very   long     message     Sending a text message    Press   HOME            and   then   tap         gt    Messages     On   the   All   messages   screen    tap   New message    The   Compose     screen   opens     Fill   in   one   or   more   recipients    You   can     Enter   phone   numbers   directly   in   the   To   field    If   you   re   sending     the   message   to   several   phone   numbers    separate   the   phone     numbers   with   a   comma      As   you   enter   information    any   matching   phone   numbers   from     your   contacts   list   are   displayed    Tap   a   match   to   enter   that     number   or   address   directl
202. n     2  Enter   the   web   page   address   using   the   keyboard    As   you   enter   the       address    matching   web   page   addresses   will   appear   on   the   screen      Tap   an   address   to   go   directly   to   that   web   page   or   continue     entering   the   web   page   address     3  Tap   the   Enter   key        on   the   onscreen   keyboard     Setting your home page    Press   HOME          and then tap      and   then   tap      gt    Internet     Press   MENU    and   then   tap   More  gt  Settings  gt  Set home page     On   the   Set   home   page   screen    select   the   home   page   you   want   to     use     Changing the screen orientation  The   phone   automatically   changes   the   screen   orientation   depending     on   how   you   are   holding   your   phone        The   Orientation   check   box   in   HOME         gt  MENU  gt  Settings  gt     Sound  amp  display   needs   to   be   selected   for   the   screen   orientation   to     automatically   change     1     1     2     3     Internet    191    Browsing full versions of all web sites  Some   web   sites   display   a   mobile   version   of   their   pages   to   phone   web     browsers    You   can   choose   to   view   the   full   version   of   all   pages    even   for     these   sites     Press   HOME          and then tap      and   then   tap      gt    Internet     Press   MENU    tap   More  gt  Settings    and   then   clear   the   Mobile vie
203. n   all   the     folders   on   the   storage   card     All videos   lets   you   view   all   videos   that   are   stored   in   all   the   folders     on   the   storage   card     All downloads   lets   you   view   photos   and   videos   that   you     downloaded     Folders   in   your   storage   card   that   contain   photos   and   videos   will   also     be   treated   as   albums   and   will   be   listed   below   the   preset   albums    The     actual   folder   names   will   be   used   as   the   album   names     Simply   tap   an   album   to   view   the   photos   and or   videos   in   that   album                                        Photos       If   there   are   photos   or   videos   under   the   root   path   of   your   storage   card      that   are   not   contained   in   folders     they   will   be   grouped   under   the     Other   album     Viewing photos and videos    After   selecting   an   album   from   the   Photos   application   s   Albums   screen      you   can   browse   through   the   photos   and   videos   of   that   album   either   in     filmstrip   or   grid   view    Tap   a   photo   or   video   to   view   it   in   full   screen     Browsing in filmstrip or grid view  By   default    photos   and   videos   are   presented   in   a   horizontal   filmstrip      Slide   your   finger   left   or   right   across   the   filmstrip   to   go   through   the     photos   and   videos     From   the   filmstri
204. n   tap      gt  People     On   the   Groups   tab    press   and   hold   the   group   you   want   to   delete      and   then   tap   Delete group     You   can   only   delete   groups   that   you   have   created     Adding or removing contacts from a group    Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  People     On   the   Groups   tab    press   and   hold   the   group    and   then   tap   Edit  group     You   can     Tap   the   group   name   to   change   the   name    You   can   only   change     the   name   for   groups   that   you   have   created        Tap   the   icon   to   the   left   of   the   group   name   to   change   or     remove   the   group   photo     To   add   contacts   to   the   group    tap   Add contact to group      select   the   contacts   you   want   to   add    and   then   tap   Save     To   remove   a   contact   from   the   group    tap        at   the   right   side       of   the   contact   name    and   then   tap   Save     5     6     1     2     1     2     3                                 8    People    Sending an SMS MMS message or email to a group    Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  People     On   the   Groups   tab    tap   the   group   you   want   to   send   an   SMS MMS     message   or   email   to     Go   to   the   Group action   tab    and   then   do   one   of   the   following     Tap   Send group message   to   send   an   SMS MMS   message   to     the   group    For 
205. n   the   Connect   to   PC   screen    select   Mobile Broadband Connect      and   then   tap   Done        When   you   are   using   your   phone   as   a   modem    the   USB   mass   storage     feature   is   disabled    and   you   are   also   not   able   to   use   HTC   Sync        1     2     3     Bluetooth    Using Bluetooth    Bluetooth   is   a   short range   wireless   communications   technology   that     allows   devices   to   exchange   information   over   a   distance   of   about   eight     meters   without   requiring   a   physical   connection        Turn   off   Bluetooth   when   not   in   use   to   conserve   battery   power    or   in     places   where   using   a   wireless   device   is   prohibited    such   as   on   board     an   aircraft   and   in   hospitals     Bluetooth     Profiles   Supported     Headset    Handsfree    Stereo    Phonebook   Access   Profiles    Turning Bluetooth on or off    Press   HOME         gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings    gt    Wireless  amp     networks     Select   or   clear   the   Bluetooth   check   box     An   even   easier   way   to   turn   Bluetooth   on   or   off   is   with   the   Bluetooth     widget   on   the   Home   screen    For   instructions   on   adding   a   widget   to     the   Home   screen    see      Adding   a   widget   to   your   Home   screen      in   the     Personalizing   chapter                                 1     2     0    Bluetooth    Changing 
206. nd   Accounts   and   sync   chapters   for   details                          Calendar    17    Creating a calendar event    You   can   create   events   that   appear   on   your   phone   only    as   well   as     events   that   sync   with   your   Google   Calendar    your   computer   s   Outlook     Calendar    or   Exchange   ActiveSync   calendar     1  Press   HOME            then   tap      and   then   tap   Calendar     2  On   any   Calendar   view    press   MENU   and   then   tap   New event     When   you   are   in   the   Month   or   Agenda   view    you   can   also   tap        at       the   bottom right   of   the   screen   to   create   a   new   event     3  If   you   have   more   than   one   calendar    select   a   calendar   in   which   to       add   the   event     Select   My Calendar   to   create   an   event   that   will   appear   only   on     your   phone     Select   your   Google   Account   to   create   a   Google   Calendar     event    If   you   have   several   Google   Calendars   on   the   Web    select     one   in   which   to   add   your   event     Select   PC Sync   to   create   an   Outlook   Calendar   event   to   sync     with   your   computer     Select   Exchange   to   create   an   Exchange   ActiveSync   calendar     event     4  Enter   a   name   for   the   event     5  To   specify   the   date   and   time   of   the   event    do   one   of   the       following     If   there   is   a   time   
207. need     to   turn   off   auto   time   synchronization   first     Press   HOME           and   then   tap   the   HTC   Clock   widget   on   the   Home       screen     Tap   the   World Clock   tab     Press   MENU   and   then   tap   Local time settings   to   open   the   Date    amp      time   settings   screen     Clear   the   Automatic   check   box     Tap   Select time zone    Scroll   through   the   list   and   then   tap   the     time   zone   that   you   want     To   change   the   date    tap   Set date    Adjust   the   date   by   rolling   the     day    month    and   year   scroll   wheels   onscreen   and   then   tap   OK     To   change   the   time    tap   Set time    Adjust   the   time   by   rolling   the     hour   and   minute   scroll   wheels   onscreen   and   then   tap   OK     Tap   the   Use 24 hour format   check   box   to   toggle   between   using   a     1 hour   or   a    hour   time   format     Tap   Select date format then   select   how   you   want   dates   to   be     displayed     The   selected   date   format   also   applies   to   the   date     displayed   in   the   alarm   clock      You   can   also   press   HOME            gt    MENU   and   then   tap   Settings  gt  Date  amp     time   to   open   the   Date    amp    time   settings   screen     1     2     3     4     5     6     7     8     9     176    Clock   and   Weather    Adding a city to the World Clock screen  Add   more   cities   to   the   
208. ng     Background data    If   this   is   selected    applications   can   send     and   receive   online   account   information   even   if   you   are   not     currently   using   them     1     2     3     4     1     2            Accounts   and   sync    111    Auto sync    If   this   is   selected    applications   can   use   the   sync     schedule   defined   in   the   account   settings    If   this   is   cleared    you     will   need   to   sync   accounts   manually    For   instructions   on   doing     this    see      Synchronizing   an   account   manually      below     Changing account settings  You   can   change   settings   such   as   the   sync   frequency   and   the   types   of     information   synchronized    the   kinds   of   notification   you   receive    and   the     way   that   account   information   is   displayed     Press   HOME            gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings  gt  Accounts  amp     sync        Tap   the   account   that   you   want   to   edit     Edit   the   account   settings     Synchronizing an account manually    Press   HOME            gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings  gt  Accounts  amp     sync        Tap   the   account   that   you   want   to   sync     Tap   Sync now     Removing an account  You   can   remove   an   account   to   delete   it   and   all   information   associated     with   it   from   your   phone    for   example   messages    contacts    or   settings      Removing
209. ng    On   the   main   Voice   Recorder   screen    tap   the     Share button            and   then   tap   Bluetooth     If   you   are   prompted   to   turn   on   Bluetooth    tap   Turn on        Tap   Scan for devices     Tap   the   name   of   the   receiving   device        If   prompted    accept   the   connection   on   the   receiving   device    and     enter   the   same   passcode   on   both   your   phone   and   the   other     device    or   confirm   the   auto generated   passcode        On   the   receiving   device    accept   the   file     The   location   where   the   information   is   saved   depends   on   the   type   of     information   and   the   receiving   device     If   you   send   a   calendar   event   or   contact    it   is   normally   added     directly   to   the   corresponding   application   on   the   receiving   device      For   example    if   you   send   a   calendar   event   to   a   compatible   phone      the   event   is   shown   in   that   phone   s   calendar   application        If   you   send   another   file   type   to   a   Windows   computer    it   is     normally   saved   in   the   Bluetooth   Exchange   folder   within   your     personal   document   folders    Refer   to   your   Windows   computer     operating   system   s   documentation   for   more   information     If   you   send   a   file   to   another   device    the   saved   location   may     depend   on   the   file   type    For 
210. ng   event   reminders                                 16    Displaying   and   synchronizing   calendars                                                              16    Showing   or   hiding   calendars                                                                             16  Choosing   which   Google   Calendars   are   synchronized   on   your     phone                                                                                                                          16    Changing   Calendar   settings                                                                                          166    Reminder   settings                                                                                                   166    1       Calendar   view   settings                                                                                           167    Sending   a   vCalendar                                                                                                         168  About   the   Calendar   widget                                                                                           169    Clock and Weather  170    About   the   HTC   Clock   widget                                                                                       170  About   the   Clock   application                                                                                           171  Using   Desk   Clock                                                          
211. ng as ringtone 238  Settings 274        alarm   sound    178      calendar    166        camera    16      display   settings    77      phone   language    80      sound   settings    79      weather    181    Setting the time zone  date  and    time 175    Setting up My contact card 76  Setting up your phone for the first    time 33    Setting your home city 174  Sharing photos on Facebook 230  Sharing photos on Flickr 231  Sharing photos on Picasa 231  Sharing videos on YouTube 231  Shortcuts 55  Sleep mode 35  SMS 94  Social network accounts 108  Speakerphone 68  Specifications 287  Speed dial 61  Stocks 261  Stopwatch 171  Sync with computer 112  Sync with online accounts 108    T  Taking a photo 213  Tethering 200  Text message 94  Timer 171  Time zone 175    Index    9    Turning off your phone 33  Turning on your phone 33  Twitter 123  Twittering on your phone 123    U  Uninstalling third party    applications 282    Updating your phone   s system    software 284    Using your phone as a modem 200    V  vCalendar 168  Video capture 215  Videos 256  Video supported formats 288  Viewfinder screen  Camera  209  Viewing a PDF 258  Viewing photos and videos 223  Viewing photos on Facebook 226  Viewing photos on Flickr 226  Voice input 91  Voice Recorder 264  Voice Search 265  VPN 187    W  Wallpaper 52  WAP push messages 100  Watching video  Photos    application  225    Weather 179    Weather widget 182  Web browser 189  Wi Fi 184  Widgets 53  58  World Clock 174    Y  Yo
212. nger   volume   While   watching   videos    press   to   increase   the   volume                         18 VOLUME DOWN    While   on   a   call    press   to   decrease   earpiece   volume   While   not   on   a   call    press   to   decrease   the   ringer   volume     While   watching   videos    press   to   decrease   the   volume                           Basics    7    Before turning on your phone    Back cover    Removing the back cover    Remove   the   back   cover   to   access   the   battery   compartment   and     storage   card   slot     With   the   phone   turned   off    hold     your   phone   securely   with   the     front   facing   down     With   your   thumb   or   finger    lift     up   the   top   of   the   back   cover     from   the   small   opening   near   the     POWER   button     1     2     Replacing the back cover    Secure   and   press   the   bottom   part     of   the   back   cover   first   by   aligning     into   the   two   openings   located   at     the   bottom   part   of   the   back   of     the   phone     Press   the   sides   and   the   top   part     of   the   back   cover   down   to   lock     the   cover   into   place    You   will   hear     a   click   when   the   back   cover   is     locked   in   place      1     2     8    Basics    Storage card    Store   your   pictures    music    and   applications   in   the   microSD   card        Inserting the storage card    Remove   the   back   cover    Refer 
213. ngs  gt  Accounts  amp     sync        Tap   Add account    gt    Google     Follow   the   onscreen   instructions   to   sign   in   to   an   account   or     create   a   new   account     2     3     1     2     3     110    Accounts   and   sync    Synchronizing with a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync  account  You   can   only   add   one   Microsoft   Exchange   ActiveSync   account   on     your   phone    You   can   sync   with   Microsoft   Exchange   Server   00     Service   Pack       SP    or   later     Press   HOME            gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings  gt  Accounts  amp     sync        Tap   Add account    gt    Exchange ActiveSync     Enter   the   Exchange   ActiveSync   account   details    and   then   tap     Next        Your   corporate   Exchange   Server   must   support   auto detect   for     the   phone   to   automatically   set   up   the   Exchange   ActiveSync     account    If   your   corporate   Exchange   Server   does   not   support     auto detect    you   will   need   to   enter   your   Exchange   Server   settings     after   you   tap   Next    Ask   your   Exchange   Server   administrator   for     details     Select   the   types   of   information   you   want   to   synchronize    and     then   tap   Finish setup        Managing your accounts    Changing general sync settings    Press   HOME            gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings  gt  Accounts  amp     sync        Select   or   clear   the   followi
214. nses   you   receive    This   conversation   list   continues   to   grow   as   new     replies   arrive    so   you   can   always   see   your   messages   in   context    A   new     message   or   a   change   to   the   subject   of   a   current   message   will   begin   a     new   conversation     Press   HOME           and   then   tap         gt    Gmail Google Mail        To   scroll   through   the   conversation   list    swipe   your   finger   up down     on   the   screen   or   the   optical   trackball     1     2     Email    17    6      7  1      1     Folder    or   Label    and   number   of   unread   email   messages             Unread   messages   are   displayed   in   bold             Checked   email    Select   one   or   more   emails   to   apply   an   action          Note    Batch   operations   needs   to   be   enabled          Actions   for   checked   email s     This   will   not   show   if   there   is   no     item   selected   in   the   inbox          Starred   message    Tap   to   add   or   remove   the   star    For   more     information    see      Starring   a   message      in   this   chapter     6     Message   label     7     The   Google   Account   you   are   currently   viewing    To   view   another     account    see      Switching   to   another   Google   Account      below     18    Email    Switching to another Google Account  If   you   have   set   up   more   than   one   Google   Account   on   your   phon
215. o   most   of   the   things   that   you   would   do     when   you   re   using   your   computer   s   web   browser   to   access   your     Facebook   account    such   as   adding   a   friend   and   adding   captions     to   photos   you   upload     The   two   do   not   share   the   same   login   credentials    Signing   in   to     Facebook   for   HTC   Sense   does   not   sign   you   in   to   the   Facebook     application   and   vice   versa    If   you   want   to   use   the   same   Facebook     account   for   both    you   ll   have   to   sign   in   to   both   using   the   same     login   credentials     1     2     3                          Social    1    Twittering on your phone    Peep   is   a   Twitter      client   that   lets   you   enjoy      twittering         on   your     phone    Send   out   tweets    read   and   receive   tweets   from   people    search     for   new   Twitter   users   to   follow    all   from   your   phone     Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  Peep     If   you   did   not   sign   in   to   your   Twitter   account   when   you   first     turned   on   the   phone    follow   the   onscreen   instructions   to   sign   in     to   your   Twitter   account     Peep   opens   in   the   All Tweets   tab    Slide   your   finger   on   the   bottom     row   to   go   to   the   tab   you   want     Peep screen       1    6  7    1     2     3     1    Social    1     Tap   to   view   the 
216. ollowing     controls   on   the   Viewfinder   screen                   10    Camera    1        1  Menu tab    Tap   to   open   the   menu   panel   and   change   camera   settings      See      Changing   camera   settings      for   details        2  View button    Tap   to   open   the   Photos   application   so   you   can   browse   through   and   view   the     photos   and   videos   in   your   storage   card      See   the   Photos   chapter   for   details     3  Auto focus indicator    Whenever   you   point   the   camera   at   a   different   subject   or   location    the   screen     shows   the   auto focus   indicator   at   the   center   as   the   camera   automatically     focuses   on   the   center   of   the   screen   When   you   tap   another   area   on   the   screen    the   indicator   will   move   to   where   you     tapped   and   the   camera   will   automatically   focus   on   that   area     4  Zoom button    Tap   to   display   or   hide   the   onscreen   zoom   bar      See      Zooming      for   details     5  Flash button    Tap   to   switch   between   the   different   camera   flash   modes     Camera    11    Using the optical trackball as the shutter release  The   optical   trackball   works   as   the   shutter   release   for   the   camera    Press     the   optical   trackball   to   take   a   photo   or   begin   capturing   video    Press   it     again   to   stop   capturing   video     Review screen  After
217. on     over   Bluetooth        On   the   phone    open   the   application   that   contains   the   information     or   file   you   want   to   send    For   example    if   you   want   to   transfer   a     photo    press   HOME            and   then   tap   gt    Photos        Follow   the   steps   for   the   type   of   item   you   want   to   send     Photo or video    in   Camera     After   capturing   a   photo    on     the   preview   screen    tap   the   Share   button            and   then   tap       Bluetooth     Photos and videos    in   Photos     On   the   Albums   tab            tap       an   album    Tap   the   Share   button            tap   Bluetooth    select   the       items   you   want   to   share    and   then   tap   Next     Calendar event    In   the   Calendar   s   Day   view    Agenda   view      or   Week   view    press   and   hold   the   event    and   then   tap   Share  vCalendar    gt    Bluetooth     Contact    On   the   People   screen   s   All   tab            press   and       hold   the   contact    and   then   tap   Send contact as vCard    Tap     the   down   arrow   icon    and   then   select   Bluetooth   from   the     displayed   list    Then   tap   Send                                 1     2     3                                 06    Bluetooth    Music track    With   the   track   displayed   on   the   Now   playing     screen    press   MENU    and   then   tap   Share  gt  Bluetooth     Voice recordi
218. on    Read   legal   information   from   HTC   and   Google    and   licenses   used   by   the     phone     1     2     3     Update and reset    Updating your phone   s system software    From   time   to   time    system   software   updates   for   your   phone   may   be     available    Your   phone   can   check   and   then   notify   you   if   an   update   is     available    You   can   then   download   and   install   the   update   to   your   phone     Depending   on   the   type   of   update    the   update   may   erase   all   your     personal   data   and   customized   settings    and   also   remove   any   programs     you   have   installed    Make   sure   that   you   have   backed   up   the   information     and   files   you   want   to   keep     Checking   and   downloading   system   software   updates   may   incur     additional   data   transfer   fees   from   your   mobile   operator     When   there   is   an   update   available    the   Install   system   software     update   dialog   box   will   appear   onscreen     On   the   dialog   box    select Install now    and   then   tap   OK     Select   Install later   if   you   want   to   install   the   system   update   at   a   later     time    When   you   are   ready   to   install    open   the   Notifications   panel    and     then   tap   System update is ready     Wait   for   the   update   process   to   finish    When   the   update   is     finished    the   phone  
219. on   area   of   the   title   bar     Open   the   web   browser   to   access   resources   such   as   intranet     sites   on   your   corporate   network    See      Using   your   phone   s   web     browser      for   more   information     Disconnecting from a VPN    Press   and   hold   the   title   bar    and   then   slide   down   your   finger   to     open   the   Notifications   panel     Tap   the   VPN   connection   to   return   to   the   VPN   settings   screen      and   then   tap   the   VPN   connection   to   disconnect   from   it        When   your   phone   has   disconnected   from   the   VPN    the   VPN     disconnected   icon        is   displayed   in   the   notification   area   of   the   title   bar     Using your phone   s web browser    Open   the   web   browser   to   start   surfing   the   web    The   browser   is   fully     optimized   and   comes   with   advanced   features   that   let   you   enjoy     Internet   browsing   on   your   phone     You   must   have   an   active   data   connection   or   Wi Fi   connection   to     access   the   Internet     Opening the browser  Do   one   of   the   following     Press   HOME            and   then   tap   Internet     Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt    Internet     3     4     1     2                   190    Internet    Going to a web page    On   the   browser   screen    press   MENU   and   then   tap   the   URL   field     on   top   of   the   scree
220. on your Home screen    Use   folders   to   group   related   applications   and   other   shortcuts   to   keep     your   Home   screen   tidy   and   organized     You   can   also   add   information   folders   that   show   up to date     information   such   as   Bluetooth   received   files    your   Facebook     phonebook    and   more     Personalizing    7    Creating a new folder and adding items to it    Press   HOME            Go   to   the   part   of   the   Home   screen   where   there   s       space   to   add   a   new   folder    To   find   out   how    see      Navigating   the     Home   screen      in   the   Basics   chapter     Tap        or   press   and   hold   on   the   Home   screen   to   open   the   Add       to   Home   options   menu     Tap   Folder   and   then   tap   New Folder     Press   and   hold   an   application   icon   or   a   shortcut   that   you   want   to     move   to   the   folder    The   phone   then   vibrates    Don   t   lift   your   finger     Drag   the   application   icon   or   shortcut   and   drop   it   on   top   of   the     folder     Simply   tap   the   folder   to   open   it   so   you   can   access   the   applications     and   shortcuts   inside   the   folder     1     2     3     4     5     8    Personalizing    Renaming a folder    Tap   the   folder   to   open   it     Press   and   hold   the   folder   window   s   title   bar     Enter   a   new   folder   name   and   then   tap   
221. onger     be   synchronized   on   your   phone    but   you   remain   subscribed   to   them     and   can   work   with   them   in   Google   Calendar   on   the   Web     1     2     3     4     166    Calendar    Adding a Google Calendar to sync with  Only   the   calendars   that   you   ve   created   or   subscribed   to   on   the   Web      but   previously   removed   from   your   calendars   list    are   shown   in   the   list     of   calendars   that   you   can   add     In   any   Calendar   view    press   MENU   and   then   tap   More  gt  Calendars     Press   MENU   again   and   then   tap   Add calendars     Select   a   Google   Calendar   to   add   to   your   calendars   list    and   then     tap   OK     Press   BACK        to   update   Calendar   with   the   new   changes   and       return   to   the   Calendar   view   you   were   viewing     Changing Calendar settings    You   can   change   Calendar   s   settings   to   specify   how   it   displays   events     and   how   it   notifies   you   of   upcoming   events    In   any   Calendar   view    press     MENU   and   then   tap   More  gt  Settings   to   access   Calendar   s   settings     Reminder settings  Choose   how   you   want   Calendar   to   issue   event   reminders   when   there     are   upcoming   events     All calendars    Select   this   check   box   to   use   the   same   event   reminder   settings   for   all     types   of   calendars    If   you   clea
222. ontact     Changing the default communication method    Tap   the   contact   s   name    not   the   photo    on   the   widget     Press   MENU   and   then   tap   More  gt  Set widget action     On   the   Select   default   action   screen    tap   the   new   communication     method   you   want   for   the   contact     1     2     3     4     1     2     3     1     2     3     People    87    Getting in touch with a contact    Press   HOME            and   then   go   to   the   People   widget     Tap   a   contact    photo   not   the   name    on   the   widget    The   default     communication   method   will   be   performed     Tap   the   name   of   the   contact   to   open   the   contact   details   screen   for     that   contact     If   you   have   not   set   a   default   communication   method    the     Select   default   action   screen   will   open    See      Setting   the   default     communication   method      in   this   chapter   for   details     1     2     Keyboard    Using the onscreen keyboard    When   you   start   a   program   or   select   a   field   that   requires   text   or     numbers    the   onscreen   keyboard   becomes   available     Using the landscape onscreen keyboard  When   entering   text    you   can   choose   to   use   the   landscape   orientation     of   the   onscreen   keyboard    Turn   the   phone   sideways   to   use   a   larger     keyboard   that   lets   you   type   easily   using   two   thu
223. orts   and   know   when   a   picture   message   is     received    in   the   All   messages   screen    press   MENU    and   then   tap     Settings    Select   the   Delivery reports   check   box   in   the   MMS   settings     section            Messages    99    Saving and resuming a draft message  While   composing   a   text   or   multimedia   message    press   BACK        to       automatically   save   your   message   as   a   draft    To   resume   composing   the     message     On   the   All   messages   screen    press   MENU    and   then   tap   Drafts        Tap   the   message   to   resume   editing   it     When   you   finish   editing   the   message    tap   Send     New message notifications    Depending   on   your   notification   settings    the   phone   will   play   a     ringtone    vibrate    or   display   the   message   briefly   in   the   status   bar     when   you   receive   a   new   text   or   multimedia   message    To   change   the     notification   for   new   text   and   multimedia   messages    see      Setting   text     and   multimedia   message   options      later   in   this   chapter     1     2     3     100    Messages    A   new   message   icon        also   appears   in   the   notifications   area   of       the   status   bar   to   notify   you   of   a   new   text   or   multimedia   message      The   Messages   application   icon    if   shown   on   the   Home   screen    also     displays   the   n
224. ouTube   screen    tap   a   video   to   watch   from   the   available     categories        While   watching   a   video    press   MENU    and   then   tap   Share     Select   how   you   want   to   share   the   video   link            4     1     2     3     4     1     2     3     1     2     3     4     8    More   apps    Capturing a video and sharing it on YouTube  You   need   to   be   signed   in   to   your   Google   Account   to   upload   your     video   to   YouTube     Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  YouTube     Tap             Press   the   optical   trackball   to   start   capturing   video    When   you   are     done   capturing    press   the   optical   trackball   again    Tap   Done        Enter   a   title    description    and   tags   for   your   video     Set   the   privacy   level        Tap   Upload        Viewing a PDF    Use   PDF Viewer   to   view   PDF   files   that   you   have   copied   to   the   phone   s     storage   card        Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  PDF Viewer     On   the   Open   file   screen    tap   the   file   you   want   to   view        Slide   your   finger   on   the   screen   to   pan   or   go   through   the   pages   of     the   PDF    While   viewing   a   PDF    press   MENU    and   then   tap     Open   to   open   another   PDF   file     Toolbar Toolbar off   to   toggle   between   showing   and   hiding   the     toolbar     View   to   view   the   PDF
225. our   Home   screen   to   open   applications     quicker    You   can   also   add   shortcuts   to   settings   and   specific     information   such   as   a   bookmarked   webpage    someone   s   phone     number    a   music   playlist    route   directions    and   many   other   items    to     your   Home   screen     The   shortcuts   available   depend   on   the   applications   that   are   installed     on   your   phone     Press   HOME            Go   to   the   part   of   the   Home   screen   where   there   s       space   to   add   a   new   shortcut    To   find   out   how    see      Navigating     the   Home   screen      in   the   Basics   chapter     Tap        or   press   and   hold   on   the   Home   screen   to   open   the   Add       to   Home   options   menu     Do   one   of   the   following     To   add   an   application   icon    tap   Program   and   then   select   an     application     To   add   a   shortcut   to   a   setting   or   information    tap   Shortcut   and     then   select   the   type   of   information   or   setting     1     2     3                   6    Personalizing    To   add   an   application   icon   on   the   Home   screen    you   can   also   press     HOME            tap         and   then   press   and   hold   an   application   icon        Without   lifting   your   finger    drag   the   icon   to   an   empty   area   on   the     Home   screen    and   then   release   it     Adding folders 
226. ours     The   above   are   subject   to   network   and   phone   usage                            Expansion slot  microSD      memory   card    SD    0   compatible     AC adapter  Voltage   range frequency    100       0V   AC    0 60   Hz  DC   output    V   and   1A    Special features  Friend   Stream    Specifications   are   subject   to   change   without   prior   notice     Index    Symbols    3G 183    A  Adding a city to the Weather    screen 180    Adding a city to the World Clock    screen 176    Adding a new contact 78  Adding application icons and other    shortcuts on your Home  screen 55    Adding a widget to your Home    screen 53    Adding folders on your Home    screen 56    Adjusting the volume 44  Airplane Mode 72  Alarm clock 176  Album  Photos application  221  Android Market 267  Answering an incoming call 63  Audio supported formats 288    B  Backing up contacts 284  Backing up your contacts to the    storage card 80    Battery times 288  Bluetooth 201        connecting   headset   or   car   kit    0      sending   and   receiving       information    0        sending   photos   or   videos    0    Bookmarks 197  Browser 189    C  Calendar application 156  Calendar widget 169  Call history 69  Call services 71  Camera 209  Capturing video 215  Changing your wallpaper 52  Checking information about your    phone 283    Checking weather 179  Clock 170  Clock widget  HTC  170    90    Index    Conference call 67  Connecting your phone to a    comput
227. ow   the   same   cropping   steps   as     above     Sharing    Using   the   Photos   application    you   can   send   photos   and   videos   via     email   or   MMS    You   can   share   photos   on   your   social   networks    such   as     Facebook    Flickr    Picasa    and   Twitter    and   share   videos   on   YouTube      You   can   also   send   them   to   another   phone   or   your   computer   using     Bluetooth     6     7     8     Photos    9    Sending photos or videos by email  You   can   send   several   photos    videos    or   both   in   an   email   message      They   are   added   as   file   attachments   in   your   email     Press   HOME            tap         and   then   tap   Photos     Tap   the   album   where   the   photos   or   videos   you   want   to   share   are     in     Tap        and   then   on   the   Share   options   menu    tap   Gmail Google    Mail   or   Mail     Select   the   photos   or   videos   you   want   to   share   and   then   tap   Next     Compose   your   message   and   then   tap   Send     If   you   selected Mail   and   you   have   multiple   email   accounts    the   default     email   account   will   be   used     Sending a photo or video by MMS  Although   you   can   send   several   photos   or   videos   in   a   multimedia     message    it   may   be   better   to   just   send   one   at   a   time    especially   if   the     files   are   big   in   size     Press   HOME         
228. p   view    press   MENU   and   then   tap   Grid view   to   browse     photos   and   videos   by   thumbnails    Slide   your   finger   up   or   down   to     scroll   through   the   thumbnails         Photos    To   change   back   to   displaying   photos   and   videos   in   a   filmstrip    press     MENU   and   then   tap   Filmstrip view     Whether   you   re   in   filmstrip   or   grid   view    you   can   press   and   hold   on     a   photo   or   video   to   open   a   selection   menu   and   choose   what   to   do     with   the   photo   or   video     If   you   want   to   select   another   album    tap        to   return   to   the   Photos       application   s   Albums   screen                   Viewing a photo in landscape orientation  Turn   your   phone   sideways   to   the   left   to   view   the   picture   in   landscape     mode    The   picture   orientation   automatically   adjusts   to   how   you   hold     the   phone     Photos       Zooming in or out on a photo  There   are   two   ways   you   can   zoom   in   or   out   of   a   photo     Tap   the   screen   twice   quickly   to   zoom   in    then   tap   the   screen     twice   quickly   again   to   zoom   out     You   can   also   use   pinch   zooming    Press   your   thumb   and   index     finger   on   the   screen   and   then   spread   your   fingers   apart   to   zoom     in    Pinch   your   fingers   together   to   zoom   out     Zooming   in  Zooming  
229. played   on   the   key     is   the   character   that   will   be   inserted   when   you   press   and   hold   that   key      Some   keys   have   multiple   characters   or   accents   associated   with   them     This   is   the   Shift   key    Tap   to   enter   an   uppercase   letter    The   next   letter   you     type   will   be   uppercase    Tap   twice   to   turn   on   caps   lock     Tap   to   switch   to   the   numeric   and   symbol   keyboard     This   is   the   Enter   key    Tap   to   create   a   new   line     1     2                          90    Keyboard    This   is   the   Backspace   key    Tap   to   delete   the   previous   character     Tap   to   hide   the   onscreen   keyboard     Tap   to   activate   voice   input    When   prompted    speak   clearly   into   the     microphone   to   enter   you   text   onscreen     Tap   to   toggle   between   Multitap   and   XT9   predictive   modes   when   using     the   Compact   QWERTY   or   Phone   keypad   layout    For   more   information      see      Entering   words   with   predictive   text      below     Entering words with predictive text  The   onscreen   keyboard   has   predictive   text   to   help   you   type   quickly     and   accurately    Predictive   text   input   is   enabled   by   default    and   word     suggestions   are   displayed   as   you   type     To   enter   a   word   in   predictive   mode    do   any   of   the   following     If   you   see 
230. preadsheet     Tap   Send   to   send   the   message   immediately    or   tap   Save as draft     if   you   want   to   send   it   later     To   open   a   draft   email    in   the   email   account   Inbox    press   MENU    and     then   tap   Folders    gt    Drafts     Viewing and replying to an email message    Press   HOME           and   then   tap         gt    Mail        On   the   email   account   Inbox    tap   the   email   you   want   to   view     For   an   Exchange   ActiveSync   account    you   can   mark   an   email    To     mark   an   email    while   viewing   an   email    tap   the   white   flag        on       the   upper right   corner   of   the   screen    The   flag   turns   red        when       you   mark   the   message     Tap   Reply   or   Reply all   to   reply   to   the   email        You   can   copy    look   up    translate    or   share   text   from   an   email   message      For   information   on   how   to   do   this    see      Copying   text    looking   up     information    and   sharing      in   the   Internet   chapter                          6     1     2     3     1    Email    Editing email account settings    Press   HOME           and   then   tap         gt    Mail     Switch   to   the   email   account   you   want   to   edit     Press   MENU   and   then   tap   More  gt  Settings        Select   from   the   following   settings     Account settings  Change   the   email   account   settings   su
231. preset   wallpapers     After   changing   the   wallpaper    remember   to   save   it   to   the   scene     that   you   created   or   save   it   as   a   new   scene    To   find   out   how   to     save   a   scene    see      Customizing   and   saving   a   scene        Personalizing your Home screen with widgets    Widgets   put   at a glance   important   information   and   media   content     up   front   on   your   Home   screen    Some   widgets   are   already   added   to     your   Home   screen   for   your   convenience    You   can   add   more   from   the     available   selections   of   widgets    or   download   more   widgets     Adding a widget to your Home screen  A   wide   selection   of   widgets   is   available   for   you   to   choose   from    such     as   Calendar    Music    Photo   Album    Friend   Stream    Twitter    and   more     Press   HOME            Go   to   the   part   of   the   Home   screen   where   there   s       space   to   add   a   new   widget    To   find   out   how    see      Navigating   the     Home   screen      in   the   Basics   chapter     Tap        or   press   and   hold   on   the   Home   screen   to   open   the   Add       to   Home   options   menu     Tap   Widget   and   then   select   a   widget   that   you   want     Most   HTC   widgets   are   available   in   a   variety   of   designs   and   sizes     to   suit   your   needs    Tap   the   right   or   left   arrow   button   at  
232. press   and   hold   the   item     Swipe or slide    To   swipe   or   slide   means   to   quickly   drag   your   finger   vertically   or     horizontally   across   the   screen   or   optical   trackball         Basics    Drag    Press   and   hold   your   finger   with   some   pressure   before   you   start     to   drag    While   dragging    do   not   release   your   finger   until   you   have     reached   the   target   position     Flick    Flicking   the   screen   is   similar   to   swiping    except   that   you   need   to   swipe     your   finger   in   light    quicker   strokes    This   finger   gesture   is   always   in   a     vertical   direction    such   as   when   flicking   the   contacts   or   message   list     Rotate    For   most   screens    you   can   automatically   change   the   screen     orientation   from   portrait   to   landscape   by   rotating   the   phone   to   the     left    When   entering   text    you   can   turn   the   phone   sideways   to   bring   up     a   bigger   keyboard    Refer   to   the   Settings   chapter   for   more   details     Pinch    For   some   applications    like   Photos   or   the   web   browser    you   can      pinch        the   screen   using      fingers    for   example    thumb   and   index   fingers    to     zoom   in   or   zoom   out   when   viewing   a   picture   or   a   web   page     Basics       Getting started    Once   you   ve   installed   your   battery    yo
233. ps    Scroll   through   the   list   of     featured   apps   when   you   open   Android   Market     Browse   apps   by   categories    First    tap   Apps or   Games   and   then     tap   a   category    Under   a   category    you   can   filter   the   apps   by     Top paid    Top free   or   Just in     Paid   apps   are   currently   only   available   in   certain   countries     Search   for   an   app    Tap        on   the   Android   Market   home   screen        enter   the   name   or   type   of   app   you   re   looking   for    and   then   tap          to   the   right   of   the   search   box     Tap   an   app   to   read   a   description   about   the   app   and   user   reviews     Tap   Install    for   free   applications    or   Buy    for   paid   applications      1     2     3                          4     5     More   apps    69    You   need   a   Google   Checkout   account   to   purchase   items   on   Android     Market    See      Creating   a   Google   Checkout   account      to   set   up   a   Google     Checkout   account   if   you   do   not   have   one     The   subsequent   screen   notifies   you   whether   the   app   will     require   access   to   your   personal   information   or   access   to     certain   functions   or   settings   of   your   phone    If   you   agree   to   the     conditions    tap   OK   to   begin   downloading   and   installing   the   app     If   you   selected   a   paid   application  
234. r   on   the   screen   or   the   optical   trackball   to   view   other     areas   of   the   map     Zooming in or out of a map  Tap        to   zoom   in    tap        to   zoom   out     1     2         Maps   and   location    Getting an address and additional information for a location  Touch    amp    hold   a   location   on   the   map    A   balloon   opens   over   the   location      with   the   address   and   a   thumbnail   from   street   view    if   available     Tap   the     balloon   to   see   more   information   or   to   get   directions   to   that   location     Looking at a location in Street View  Street   View   mode    available   only   in   selected   areas    provides   a   street   level   view   of   the   location     1  Do   one   of   the   following     Touch   and   hold   a   location   on   the   map    and   then   tap   the     balloon   that   appears     Search   for   the   place   you   want   to   view    See      Searching   for   a     location      in   this   chapter   for   details    When   you   find   the   place      tap   its   balloon     2  On   the   location   details   screen    tap   Street view     3  To   navigate   in   Street   View    do   any   of   the   following     y    While   viewing   a   Street   View   of   a   location    press   MENU   and   then   tap     Compass mode   to   turn   Compass   mode   on    Tilt    pan    or   turn   your     phone   to   view   the   area   around   the   se
235. r   this   check   box    you   can   set   different     reminder   settings   for   each   calendar     Set alerts  amp  notifications    Configure   event   reminders   to   open   an   alert    send   you   a   notification    or     turn   off   event   notifications   on   your   phone     1     2     3     4     Calendar    167    Default reminder time    Choose   how   soon   before   an   event   you   want   to   be   notified     Select ringtone    Choose   a   ringtone   to   sound   when   you   receive   an   event   reminder     Vibrate    Choose   whether   you   want   your   phone   to   vibrate   when   you   receive   an     event   notification     Hide declined events    Choose   whether   to   show   or   hide   events   to   which   you   ve   declined     invitations     Calendar view settings  Choose   what   appears   in   Calendar   when   opened   and   what   s   shown   in     Day    Week    and   Month   views     Start in    Choose   the   default   Calendar   view   that   is   displayed   when   you   open     Calendar     Day views    Choose   whether   to   display   Day   view   in   the   form   of   an   event   list   or     time   list     First day of week    Set   the   Month   and   Week   views   to   start   on   a   Sunday   or   Monday     168    Calendar    Include weather    Make   sure   this   check   box   is   selected   so   that   weather   information   is     shown   in   Day   view   s   event   list     City    By  
236. r  Recalibrate   the   screen   if   you   feel   that   the   screen   orientation   does   not     respond   properly   to   the   way   you   hold   the   phone        Press   HOME            gt    MENU    then   tap   Settings  gt  Sound  amp  display     Scroll   down   the   screen    and   then   tap G Sensor calibration     Place   the   phone   on   a   flat   and   level   surface    and   then   tap   Calibrate     After   the   recalibration   process    tap   OK     Switching animation effects on or off  You   can   turn   off   the   animation   or   enable   only   some   animations   when     switching   between   screens        Press   HOME            gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings  gt  Sound  amp  display     Scroll   down   the   screen    and   then   tap   Animation     On   the   options   menu    select   the   animation   setting   you   want        Keeping the screen on while charging the phone  You   can   keep   the   phone   screen   from   turning   off   while   you   are     charging   the   phone     Press   HOME            gt    MENU    then   tap   Settings     Scroll   down   the   screen    and   then   tap   Applications  gt  Development     Select   the   Stay awake check   box     1     2     3     4     1     2     3     1     2     3     Settings    79    Changing sound settings    Setting a sound profile  Switch   to   vibrate   or   silent   mode    or   use   the   normal   phone   sound   settings     Press   HOME       
237. rd    at   least   8   characters   without   any   spaces      for   the   credential   storage    scroll   down   and   confirm   the   password      and   then   tap   OK     Select   the   Use secure credentials   check   box     You   can   then   download   and   install   the   certificates   needed   to   access   your     local   network   Your   network   administrator   can   tell   you   how   to   do   this     Adding a VPN connection    Press   HOME         gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings    gt    Wireless  amp     networks    gt    VPN settings     Tap   Add VPN    and   then   tap   the   type   of   VPN   you   want   to   add     Tap   the   VPN   settings   and   set   them   up   according   to   the   security     details   you   have   obtained   from   your   network   administrator     When   finished    press   MENU    and   then   tap   Save     The   VPN   is   then   added   to   the   VPNs   section   of   the   VPN   settings   screen     Connecting to a VPN    Press   HOME         gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings    gt    Wireless  amp     networks    gt    VPN settings     In   the   VPNs   section    tap   the   VPN   that   you   want   to   connect   to     1     2     3     1     2     3     4     1     2     Internet    189    When   prompted    enter   your   log   in   credentials    and   then   tap     Connect      When   you   are   connected    the   VPN   connected   icon        appears   in       the   notificati
238. reen    press   MENU    and   then   tap   Delete        Select   the   message   threads   you   want   to   delete        Tap   Delete    Any   locked   messages   will   not   be   deleted     1     2     3     4     1     2     3     4     1     2     3     4     10    Messages    Deleting a single message    While   viewing   a   message   thread    press   and   hold   the   message     that   you   want   to   delete        If   the   message   is   locked    tap   Unlock message   on   the   options     menu    and   then   press   and   hold   the   message   to   display   the     options   menu   again     Tap   Delete message   on   the   options   menu        When   prompted   to   confirm    tap   OK     Viewing contact details and communicating with a  contact  When   you   have   received   a   message   from   someone   in   your   stored     contacts    you   can   tap   the   contact   s   photo   or   icon   in   the   message     thread   to   open   a   menu   of   options    Depending   on   the   stored   contact     information    you   can   view   the   contact   details    phone   or   send   an   email     message   to   the   contact    and   more     Setting text and multimedia message options    Press   HOME         and   then   tap         gt    Messages    On   the   All   messages       screen    press   MENU   and   then   tap   Settings   to   set   the   text   or     multimedia   message   options    You   can   set   the   following    
239. reminders     Press   BACK        to   keep   the   reminders   pending   in   the       notifications   area   of   the   status   bar                                               Calendar    16    Displaying and synchronizing calendars    You   can   select   which   calendars   to   show   or   hide   on   your   phones     Calendar    and   which   ones   to   keep   synchronized     Showing or hiding calendars  In   any   Calendar   view    press   MENU       tap   More  gt  Calendars    and   then     select   or   clear   a   calendar   to   show   or   hide   it    Tap   All calendars   to     display   all   calendars     The   calendars   are   kept   synchronized   on   your   phone    whether   or   not     you   hide   them     Choosing which Google Calendars are synchronized on  your phone  You   can   choose   which   Google   Calendars   to   keep   synchronized   on     your   phone   or   which   ones   to   stop   synchronizing     Stop synchronizing a Google Calendar    In   any   Calendar   view    press   MENU   and   then   tap   More  gt   Calendars     Press   MENU   again   and   then   tap   Remove calendars     Select   a   Google   Calendar   to   remove   from   your   calendars   list    and     then   tap   OK     Press   BACK        to   update   Calendar   with   the   new   changes   and       return   to   the   Calendar   view   you   were   viewing     The   calendars   that   you   remove   from   your   calendars   list   will   no   l
240. ress   HOME            gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings     Scroll   down   the   screen    and   then   tap   Security    gt    Set unlock  pattern     Read   the   information   on   the   screen    and   then   tap   Next     Study   the   example   pattern   on   the   screen    and   then   tap   Next     Draw   the   screen   unlock   pattern   by     connecting   at   least   four   dots   in   a   vertical      horizontal   and or   diagonal   direction    Lift   your     finger   from   the   screen   when   finished     You   must   slide   your   finger   on   the   screen   to     create   the   pattern   and   not   tap   individual     dots     The   phone   records   the   pattern    Tap   Continue     When   prompted    draw   the   screen   unlock     pattern   again    and   then   tap Confirm     Clear   the   Use visible pattern   check   box   if   you     do   not   want   the   unlock   pattern   to   display   on     the   screen   when   you   unlock   it     5     6     7     1     2     3     4     Security    7    To   change   your   unlock   screen   pattern    press   HOME            gt    MENU    and       then   tap   Settings  gt  Security  gt  Change unlock pattern     When   you   fail   to   draw   the   correct   unlock   pattern   on   the   screen   after     five   attempts    you   will   be   prompted   to   wait   for   0   seconds   before   you     can   try   again    If   you   forgot   your   screen   unlock   pattern 
241. riends    locations  You   can   view   your   friends      locations   on   a   map   or   in   a   list     When   you   open   Maps    your   friends      locations   are   shown    Each   friend     is   represented   by   their   picture    from   Contacts    with   an   arrow   pointing     to   their   approximate   location    If   a   friend   has   chosen   to   share   city level     locations    their   picture   does   not   have   an   arrow   and   appears   in   the     middle   of   the   city     To   see   a   friend   s   profile   and   connect    touch   the   photo    Your   friend   s     name   appears   in   a   balloon    Touch   the   balloon   to   open   a   screen   with     details   about   your   friend   and   many   connection   options     When   you   open   Latitude   you   see   a   list   of   your   Latitude   friends    with     a   summary   of   their   last   known   locations    status    and   so   on    Touch   a     friend   in   the   list   to   open   a   screen   with   details   about   the   friend   and     many   connection   options     5                          0    Maps   and   location    Connecting with and managing friends  Tap   a   friend   s   contact   details   balloon   in   map   view   or   tap   a   friend   in     list   view   to   open   the   friend   s   profile    In   the   profile   screen    you   can     communicate   with   your   friend   and   set   privacy   options     Show on map    Show
242. rk account  You   can   sync   with   your   accounts   on   popular   online   services   such   as     Facebook    Twitter    and   Flickr     Press   HOME            gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings  gt  Accounts  amp     sync                                           1     Accounts   and   sync    109    Tap   Add account    and   then   tap   the   account   type   you   want   to     add     Follow   the   onscreen   instructions   to   enter   the   account     information     When   you   have   finished    the   account   is   added   to   the   list   on   the     Accounts    amp    sync   screen    Depending   on   how   you   configured   the     account    the   new   information   may   start   synchronizing   with   your     phone     Synchronizing with a Google Account  Signing   in   to   your   Google   Account   lets   you   synchronize   Gmail Google     Mail   and   your   Google   contacts   and   calendars   between   your   phone     and   the   web    You   also   need   to   sign   in   to   a   Google   Account   to   use     Google   applications   such   as   Google   Talk      and   Android   Market     You   can   add   more   than   one   Google   Account   on   your   phone    However      subsequent   Google   Accounts   can   only   synchronize   Gmail Google   Mail     and   contacts    Other   Google   services   use   the   first   Google   Account   you     added     Press   HOME            gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Setti
243. rom   the   HTC   support   website      See      Downloading   the   latest   HTC   Sync   upgrade      for   details     Connect   your   phone   to   your   computer   using   the   supplied   USB     cable   and   set   up   HTC   Sync   to   recognize   your   phone    Follow   the     steps   in      Setting   Up   HTC   Sync   to   recognize   your   phone        Choose   what   information   to   sync   between   your   computer   and     your   phone   and   how   you   want   to   sync   them     To   easily   set   up   synchronization   using   HTC   Sync   s   guided     wizard    follow   the   steps   in      Setting   up   synchronization        To   choose   from   more   sync   options    see      Setting   up   more   sync     options        Sync   your   computer   with   your   phone   automatically   or   manually      See      Synchronizing   your   phone      for   details     1     2     3     1     2     3                   4     Accounts   and   sync    11    Here   s   more   you   can   do   with   HTC   Sync     If   you   have   third party   applications   on   your   computer    not   from     Android   Market     you   can   use   HTC   Sync   to   install   them   from   your     computer   to   your   phone    For   more   information    see      Installing     apps   from   your   computer   to   your   phone        Repair   contacts   and or   calendar   data    only   if   needed     Installing HTC Sync    HTC   Sync   requires   USB    
244. s     View   your   friends   list   and   write   on   someone   s   wall     Comment   on   a   friend   s   post     View   someone   s   personal   information    including   photo   albums     Check   your   Facebook   notifications     Take   a   photo   and   upload   it   straight   to   your   Facebook   account     Adding the Facebook widget  Add   the   Facebook   widget   to   the   Home   screen   to   let   you   quickly   share     your   thoughts   and   view   your   friends      status   updates        1     2     3                                               1    Social    The   widget   will   only   link   to   the   Facebook   account   that   you   logged     into   on   the   Facebook   application     Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  Widget  gt  Facebook     Choose   the   widget   style    and   then   tap   Select        Drag   the   widget   to   a   blank   space   on   the   Home   screen    and   then     release     Differences between Facebook for HTC Sense and  Facebook for Android application    Facebook   for   HTC   Sense   is   not   a   standalone   application    It   is     integrated   into   People    Friend   Stream    and   Photos   to   give   you     up to date   information   about   your   Facebook   contacts    their     status   updates   and   new   photos    in   these   applications     The   Facebook   for   Android   application   is   a   standalone   application      Use   this   application   to   d
245. s   let   you   see   exchanged   messages    similar   to   a   chat   program      with   a   contact   on   the   screen     Reading a text message  Do   one   of   the   following     On   the   All   messages   screen    tap   the   text   message   or   message     thread   to   open   and   read   it     If   you   have   a   new   message   notification    slide   the   status   bar   down     to   open   the   Notifications   panel    Tap   the   new   message   to   open     and   read   it     To   return   to   the   All   messages   screen   from   a   text   message   thread      press   MENU   and   then   tap   All messages     To   view   the   details   of   a   particular   message    in   the   message   thread      press   and   hold   the   message   to   open   the   options   menu    and   then     tap   View message details     If   a   message   contains   a   link   to   a   web   page    tap   the   message   and     then   tap   the   link   to   open   it   in   the   web   browser     If   a   message   contains   a   phone   number    tap   the   message   and     then   tap   the   phone   number   to   dial   the   number   or   add   it   to   your     contacts                          Viewing a multimedia message    Press   HOME         and   then   tap         gt    Messages     On   the   All   messages   screen    tap   a   multimedia   message   or     message   thread   to   open   it                   1     2     10    Messages    Tap
246. s   the   friend   s   location   on   the   map        Chat using Google Talk    Opens   a   Google   Talk   chat   window   with   that   friend     Send email    Opens   Gmail Google   Mail   with   a   message   addressed   to   the   friend     Get directions    Gets   directions   to   the   friend   s   location        Sharing options    Select   from   the   following        Best available location    Share   your   precise   location   information     Share only city level location    Share   only   the   city   you   are   in    not     the   street level   location    Your   friend   can   see   your   photo   icon   in     the   middle   of   the   city   you   are   in    To   share   more   precise   location     again    tap   Best available location        Hide from this friend    Stop   sharing   your   location   with   this   friend      in   a   list   or   on   a   map     Remove this friend    Remove   the   friend   from   your   list   and   stop   sharing   locations   with   him     or   her   altogether                             Maps   and   location    1    Changing privacy settings  You   have   control   over   how   and   when   you   can   be   found   by   your     friends    Only   the   last   location   sent   to   Latitude   is   stored   with   your     Google   Account    If   you   turn   off   Latitude   or   are   hiding    no   location   is     stored     In   Google   Maps    press   MENU    and   then   tap   Latitude     Tap   
247. sage                                                                                                   11  Managing   conversations   and   messages                                                       1  Changing   Gmail Google   Mail   settings                                                           16        1    Mail                                                                                                                                           17    Adding   a   POP IMAP   email   account                                                              17  Viewing   your   email   inbox                                                                                    18  Exchange   ActiveSync   email                                                                               10  Composing   and   sending   an   email   message                                                1  Viewing   and   replying   to   an   email   message                                                 1  Editing   email   account   settings                                                                       1  Deleting   an   email   account                                                                                    1  Adding   the   Mail   widget                                                                                         1    Calendar  156    About   Calendar                                                                                                             
248. sage    tap   Send     Accepting an invitation to chat  When   a   friend   sends   you   a   Google   Talk   message    you   receive   a     notification    Their   entry   in   the   Friends   list   turns   white   and   displays   the     message     Do   one   of   the   following     In   the   Friends   list    tap   the   friend   who   sent   you   the   invitation   to     chat     Open   the   Notifications   panel    and   then   tap   the   chat   notification      See      Opening   the   Notifications   panel      in   the   Basic   chapter   to     learn   how   to   open   the   Notifications   panel        Returning to the Friends list  While   on   a   chat   screen    press   MENU    and   then   tap   Friends list        Switching between active chats  You   can   switch   between   chats   if   you   have   more   than   one   chat   going     While   on   a   chat   screen    press   MENU    and   then   tap   Switch chats     On   the   screen   that   opens    tap   the   friend   you   want   to   chat   with     Inviting a friend to join a group chat    While   on   a   chat   screen    press   MENU    and   then   tap   Add to chat     Tap   the   friend   you   want   to   invite    The   friend   you   invited   and   the     current   participants   receive   an   invitation   to   a   group   chat    Each     one   who   accepts   the   invitation   joins   the   group   chat     4                   1     2     1     2     Social    11    Chat
249. sk drive    and   then   tap   Done    See      Opening   the   Notifications     panel      in   this   chapter   to   learn   how   to   open   the   Notifications     panel        Searching your phone and the Web    You   can   search   for   information   on   your   phone   and   on   the   Web   by     using   the   Quick Search Box    Some   applications    such   as   People   or     Mail    have   their   own   search   box    which   you   can   use   to   search   within     those   applications    the   application   s   icon   is   at   the   left   of   the   search     box      Setting Web and Quick Search Box options    Press   HOME            gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings        Scroll   down   the   screen    and   then   tap   Search        Tap   Google search settings    and   then   do   the   following     Select   Show web suggestions   if   you   want   to   include     suggestions   from   Google   when   doing   a   search     Select   Search history   to   enable   personalized   search   history      You   need   to   sign   in   to   your   Google   Account   to   use   this     feature    The   Show web suggestion   check   box   needs   to   be     selected   for   this   option   to   be   enabled                      1     2     3                   8    Basics    Press   BACK        when   you   are   done        Tap   Searchable items    and   then   select   the   items   you   want     included   when   doing   a   search       
250. splayed   showing   the   Wi Fi   network   name      status    speed    signal   strength    and   more     1     2     3     4     5     1     2     186    Internet    If   you   want   to   remove   the   wireless   network   settings   on   your   phone      tap   Forget   on   this   window    You   need   to   enter   the   settings   again   if   you     want   to   connect   to   this   wireless   network     Connecting to another Wi Fi network    On   the   Wireless    amp    networks   screen    tap   Wi Fi settings    Detected     Wi Fi   networks   are   displayed   in   the   Wi Fi   networks   section    To     manually   scan   for   available   Wi Fi   networks    on   the   Wi Fi   settings     screen    press   MENU   and   then   tap   Scan     2  Tap   another   Wi Fi   network   to   connect   to   it     If   the   wireless   network   you   want   to   connect   to   is   not   in   the   list   of     detected   networks    scroll   down   the   screen    then   tap Add Wi Fi  network    Enter   the   wireless   network   settings    and   then   tap   Save     Adding the Data connection and Wi Fi widgets    Add   the   Data   connection   and or   Wi Fi   widget   to   the   Home   screen     to   make   it   faster   for   you   to   turn   on   or   off   these   connections    Tap   the     widget   to   turn   on   or   off   the   connection        1     Internet    187    To   learn   how   to   add   widgets    refer   to      Adding   a   widg
251. stalled   a   storage   card   on   your   phone    For   information   on   how   to     install   a   storage   card    refer   to   the   Basics   chapter     Applications   downloaded   from   the   web   can   be   from   unknown     sources    To   protect   your   phone   and   personal   data    download     applications   only   from   trusted   sources   such   as   Android   Market    Refer     to      Finding   and   installing   apps   from   Android   Market      in   the   More     apps   chapter   for   details     Viewing your downloads  While   viewing   a   web   page    press   MENU   and   then   tap   More  gt   Downloads     Copying text  looking up information  and sharing  You   can   select   text   and   then     Copy   it     Look   it   up   on   Wikipedia   or   Google   Dictionary        Get   a   translation   of   the   text   from   Google   Translate     Share   the   text   in   a   new   email    text    or   multimedia   message   or   in     your   status   update   on   a   social   network     1     2     3                                 196    Internet    Selecting text    1  Press   and   hold   on   a   word     To   select   text   in   a   link    press   and   hold   the   link    and   then   tap   Copy text     2  Drag   the   start   and   end   markers   to   highlight   the   surrounding   text       you   want   to   select     1     1     Tap   to   copy    search translate    or   share   the   text        2     Start   
252. sts   and     in   other   locations   where   your   status   or   status   message   are   displayed     Changing your status message    Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  Talk     In   the   Friends   list    tap   the   text   box   to   the   left   of   your   online     status   icon    and   then   enter   your   status   message     1     2                   1     2     1     2     1    Social    On   the   onscreen   keyboard    tap                Changing your picture    Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  Talk     In   the   Friends   list    tap   the   picture   to   the   left   of   your   status     message     In   the   Select   an   album   screen    tap   the   album   where   the   picture     you   want   to   use   is   located     Tap   the   picture   you   want   to   use     Drag   the   green   box   to   select   the   portion   of   the   picture   to   crop      and   then   tap   Save     Managing your Friends list    Adding a friend  You   can   invite   anyone   with   a   Google   Account   to   become   your   friend     in   Google   Talk    so   you   can   chat   with   each   other   and   view   each   others        online   status     Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  Talk     In   the   Friends   list    press   MENU   and   then   tap   Add friend     Enter   the   Google   Talk   instant   messaging   ID   or   Google   email     address   of   the   friend   you   want   to   add     A
253. t   of    To   find   out   what   each   color     represents    press   MENU   and   then   tap   More  gt  Calendars     When   in   Day   view    slide   left   or   right   across   the   screen   to   view   earlier     or   later   days     In   Day   view    the   weather   information   appears   only   if   the   event   is     within   the   five day   forecast   of   the   Weather   application     Weather   information   does   not   appear   in   Day   view   when   you     change   Day   view   to   display   as   a   time   list    See      Changing   Calendar     settings      for   details                   16    Calendar    Week view  Week   view   displays   a   chart   of   the   events   of   one   week     When   in   Week   view     You   can   press   and   hold   on   a   time   slot   to   create   a   new   event   at     that   time     Tap   an   event   to   view   its   details     Slide   left   or   right   across   the   screen   to   view   earlier   or   later   weeks     In   a   crowded   Week   view    it   may   be   easier   to   select   an   event   by   using     the   optical   trackball    Then   press   the   optical   trackball   to   view   details     about   the   selected   event                          Calendar    16    Viewing  editing or deleting an event    You   can   view    edit    or   delete   events   you   created    You   can   also   view     event   invitations   that   other   people   sent   to   you     Vi
254. t as ringtone   on     the   options   menu     Renaming a voice clip    Press   HOME            and   then   tap   gt  Voice Recorder        On   the   Voice   Recorder   screen    tap             On   the   All   recording   screen    press   and   hold   the   voice   recording     you   want   to   rename    and   then   tap   Rename   on   the   options   menu     Enter   the   name    and   then   tap   Save        Using Voice Search    Google   Voice   Search   enables   you   to   do   a   search   with   Google   by     speaking   your   search   query   into   the   microphone        Opening Voice Search    Press   HOME            and   then   tap   gt  Voice Search        2     3     1     2     3     4     1     66    More   apps    Hold   the   device   s   microphone   near   your   mouth   and   speak   your     search   query   clearly   into   the   microphone    for   example      New   York     City         The   web   browser   opens   and   displays   search   results     2     More   apps    67    Finding and installing apps from Android Market    Android   Market      is   the   place   to   go   to   find   new   apps   for   your   phone      Choose   from   a   wide   variety   of   free   and   paid   apps   ranging   from     productivity   apps    entertainment    to   games    When   you   find   an   app     you   want    you   can   easily   download   and   install   it   on   your   phone   with     just   a   few   taps   of   your   finger 
255. ter   you   join   Latitude    you   can   open   it   to   find   your   friends   and   view     their   updates     While   viewing   a   map    press   MENU    and   then   tap   Latitude     Inviting friends to share their locations    While   viewing   a   map    press   MENU    and   then   tap   Latitude     In   Latitude    press   MENU    and   then   tap   Add friends        Choose   how   to   add   friends        Select from Contacts    Select   any   number   of   friends   from   your     Contacts        Add via email address    Enter   an   email   address     Tap   Add friends        1     2     1     2     3                   4     Maps   and   location    9    If   prompted    tap   Yes        If   your   friends   already   use   Latitude    they   receive   an   email     request   and   a   notification   on   Latitude    If   they   have   not   yet   joined     Latitude    they   receive   an   email   request   that   tells   them   to   sign   in     to   Latitude   with   their   Google   Account        Responding to an invitation  When   you   get   a   sharing   request   from   a   friend    you   can     Accept and share back    You   and   your   friend   can   see   each   other   s     locations        Accept  but hide my location    You   can   see   your   friend   s   location      but   they   can   t   see   yours     Don   t accept    No   location   information   is   shared   between   you   and     your   friend        Viewing your f
256. th   Bluetooth     Press   HOME            and   then   tap             On   the   Add   to   Home   screen    tap   Folder    gt    Bluetooth Received     Press   and   hold   the   Bluetooth   received   folder   icon    and   drag   it   to     the   Home   screen   position   you   want     To   view   the   folder   contents    tap   the   folder   icon    To   open   a   file    tap   the     file   name                          1     2     3     Camera    Camera basics    Whether   traveling   for   business   or   fun    enjoy   taking   photos   and   videos     of   your   trip   and   encounters   with   your   phone   s   camera     Be   sure   to   plug   in   your   microSD   card   before   you   use   your   phone   s     camera    Photos   and   videos   captured   with   the   camera   will   be   stored   onto     your   microSD   card     If   you   have   not   yet   inserted   your   microSD   card   to   your   phone    follow   the     steps   in      Inserting   the   storage   card      in   the   Basics   chapter   to   insert   it     To   open   the   camera   in   photo   mode   and   take   photos    press   HOME             and   then   tap   Camera     To   open   the   camera   directly   in   video   mode   so   you   can     immediately   start   capturing   videos    press   HOME            tap             and   then   tap   Camcorder     Viewfinder screen  The   camera   displays   in   landscape   view   only    You   ll   find   the   f
257. the phone name  The   phone   name   identifies   your   phone   to   other   devices     Press   HOME         gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings    gt    Wireless  amp     networks     If   the   Bluetooth   check   box   is   not   selected    select   it   to   turn     Bluetooth   on     Tap   Bluetooth settings    gt    Device name     Enter   the   name   for   your   phone   in   the   dialog   box    and   then   tap   OK     Connecting a Bluetooth headset or car kit    You   can   listen   to   music   over   a   Bluetooth   stereo   headset    or   have     hands free   conversations   using   a   compatible   Bluetooth   headset   or   car     kit    It   s   the   same   procedure   to   set   up   stereo   audio   and   hands free     For   you   to   listen   to   music   with   your   headset   or   car   kit    the   headset   or     car   kit   must   support   the   ADP   Bluetooth   profile     Press   HOME         gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings    gt    Wireless  amp     networks    gt    Bluetooth settings     If   Bluetooth   is   not   switched   on    tap   the   Bluetooth   check   box   to     switch   it   on     Make   sure   that   the   headset   is   discoverable    so   that   your   phone     can   find   the   headset    Refer   to   the   instructions   that   came   with   the     headset   to   find   out   how   to   set   it   in   discoverable   mode     Tap   Scan for devices    Your   phone   will   start   to   scan
258. then   tap   Replace     Renaming or deleting a scene  You   can   rename   or   delete   a   personalized   scene   that   you   created      Preset   scenes   cannot   be   renamed   or   deleted     Press   HOME         gt    MENU   and   then   tap   Settings  gt  Personalize  gt     Scenes     Under   My scenes    press   and   hold   a   scene   and   choose   whether   to     rename   or   delete   it     Changing your wallpaper    Personalizing   your   Home   screen   wallpaper   with   your   favorite   photo   is     a   quick   and   easy   way   to   change   the   feel   of   your   phone   and   give   it   a     fresh   look    Browse   the   collection   of   wallpapers   included   in   your   phone     or   choose   from   photos   that   you   have   taken   with   the   camera    You   can     also   change   your   Home   screen   to   use   an   animated   wallpaper     The   wallpaper   that   you   choose   for   the   Home   screen   will   also   be   used     as   the   lock   screen   wallpaper     Press   HOME         gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Wallpaper     Do   one   of   the   following     Tap   Live wallpapers   to   choose   from   preset   animated     wallpapers     7     8     1     2     1     2            Personalizing       Tap   My photos   to   select   a   photo   that   you   have   taken   using   the     camera   or   copied   to   your   storage   card    Crop   the   photo   and     then   tap   Save     Choose   from   
259. tically   added     to   the   Mobile   field   in   the   Phone   section         To   store   it   as   another   type   of   number    for   example   a   home     number    tap   the   Mobile   button     Scroll   down   the   screen   and   tap   Save     To   learn   how   to   add   new   contacts   or   edit   the   contact   information    see     the   People   chapter     Checking a missed call  You   will   see   the   missed   call   icon        in   the   status   bar   when   you   miss   a   call     Press   HOME            and   then   tap          Tap        at   the   bottom right   corner   of   the   screen     In   the   call   history   list    missed   calls   are   indicated   by   the   missed   call     icon                  1     2     3     4     5     1     2     3     Phone   calls    71    You   can   also   press   and   hold   the   status   bar    and   then   slide   your   finger     downward   on   the   screen   to   open   the   Notifications   panel    The   missed     call   number   or   contact   name   is   displayed     Clearing the call history list    Press   HOME            and   then   tap          Tap        at   the   bottom right   corner   of   the   screen     Do   one   of   the   following     To   remove   one   name   or   number   from   the   list    press   and   hold     the   name   or   number    and   then   tap   Delete from call history     To   clear   the   entire   list    press   MENU    and   then   tap 
260. ting on or off the record  Your   Google   Talk   messages   are   stored    so   you   can   review   them   later     and   even   search   for   them   in   the   Chats   folder   in   Gmail Google   Mail      But    if   you   d   rather   not   store   the   messages   in   a   chat    you   can   go   off     the   record     On   a   chat   screen    press   MENU    and   then   tap   Chat off record     To   resume   saving   the   messages   in   the   chat    press   MENU    and     then   tap   Chat on record     Ending a chat  Do   one   of   the   following     In   the   Friends   list    press   and   hold   the   friend   you   want   to   stop     chatting   with    and   then   in   the   menu   that   opens    tap   End chat     While   on   a   chat   screen    press   MENU    and   then   tap   End chat     Changing your online status and picture    Changing your online status    Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  Talk     In   the   Friends   list    tap   the   online   status   icon                beside   your       name    and   then   select   the   status   you   want   on   the   options   menu     In   addition   to   the   standard   status   settings   described   in   the   table    you     can   also   select   a   message   that   you   ve   entered   previously    Or   tap   Clear  custom messages   to   erase   them   and   start   over     Your   status   and   any   message   appear   in   your   contact   s   Friends   li
261. torage   card      see      Copying   files   to   and   from   the   storage   card        Ringtones   or   songs   downloaded   or   copied   to   your   storage   card   are     not   automatically   added   to   the   ringtone   selection   menu    You   need     to   go   to   the   Music   application   and   set   a   ringtone   or   song   in   your     storage   card   as   your   ringtone    To   find   out   how   to   set   a   ringtone   using     the   Music   application    see      Setting   a   song   as   ringtone      in   the   Music     chapter        See      Specifications      for   a   list   of   audio   file   formats   supported   by   your     phone     Personalizing your phone with scenes    Your   phone   becomes   multiple   phones   in   one   when   you   use   scenes      Scenes   are   personalized   Home   screen   layouts   that   you   can   quickly     apply   to   your   phone    By   switching   between   scenes    you   instantly   turn     your   phone   into   your   perfect   weekend   phone    travel   phone    work     phone    or   pure   play   phone     Using a preset scene  Your   phone   features   preset   scenes    each   preconfigured   with   a     different   wallpaper   and   collection   of   widgets   that   reflect   different     moments   in   your   life    You   can   choose   a   scene   that   is   suitable   for   work      play    travel    or   your   social   life     Press   HOME         gt    MENU    an
262. tory   guide   and   to   access   other   helpful     resources   for   your   phone                 Notice    Screen   images   and   icons   are   simulated    Actual   display   may   vary      Instructions   in   this   guide   may   change   depending   on   the   software     version   on   your   wireless   device            Trademarks and copyrights    Copyright        010   HTC   Corporation    All   Rights   Reserved     The   HTC   logo    the   HTC   quietly   brilliant   logo    HTC   Desire    HTC   Sense      Footprints    HTC   Sync    and   HTC   Care   are   trademarks   and or   service     marks   of   HTC   Corporation     Copyright        010   Google   Inc    Used   with   permission     Google    the   Google   logo    Android    Google   Search    Google   Maps      Gmail    Google   Mail    YouTube    Android   Market    and   Google   Talk   are     trademarks   of   Google   Inc     Google    the   Google   logo   and   Google   Maps   are   trademarks   of   Google      Inc    TeleAtlas     Map   Data     010    Street   View   Images     010   Google     Microsoft    Windows    Windows   XP    Windows   Vista    Active   Sync    and     Outlook   are   either   registered   trademarks   or   trademarks   of   Microsoft     Corporation   in   the   United   States   and or   other   countries     Bluetooth   and   the   Bluetooth   logo   are   trademarks   owned   by   Bluetooth     SIG    Inc     Wi Fi   is   a   registered   trademark   of   t
263. tos    and   read   Facebook   status     updates   in   Friend   Stream    To   learn   how   to   sign   in   to   Facebook   for   HTC     Sense    see   the   Accounts   and   sync   chapter     People  Photos  Friend Stream    Social    11    Facebook for Android application  The   Facebook   application   on   your   phone   lets   you   keep   up   and   stay     close   with   your   friends   in   Facebook    It   offers   most   of   the   features   that     you   are   familiar   with   when   using   Facebook   on   your   computer     If   you   have   more   than   one   Facebook   account    you   can   sign   in   to   the     Facebook   application   using   your   other   Facebook   account     Using the Facebook application    Press   HOME            and   then   tap         gt  Facebook     If   this   is   your   first   time   to   use   Facebook    follow   the   onscreen     instructions   to   sign   in   to   your   Facebook   account     On   the   News   Feed   screen    press   MENU    and   then   tap   Home   to     access   the   other   functions     While   on   the   Facebook   home   screen    press   MENU    and   then   tap     Settings   to   set   refresh   and   notification   options     On   some   Facebook   screens    you   can   press   and   hold   an   item   to     open   an   options   menu                   With the Facebook application  you can     Share   your   thoughts   and   check   other   people   s   status   update
264. u   can   turn   on   your   phone   and     start   using   it     Turning on your phone  Press   the   POWER   button     When   you   turn   on   the   phone   for   the   first   time    you   will   be   prompted     to   set   up   your   phone    For   more   information   on   how   to   set   up   your     phone   for   the   first   time    see      Setting   up   your   phone   for   the   first   time        Turning off your phone  If   you   do   not   need   to   use   your   phone    you   can   turn   the   power   off   to     save   battery   life     If   the   display   is   off    press   the   POWER   button   to   turn   the   display     back   on     Unlock   your   phone   if   the   Lock   screen   is   displayed    See        Unlocking   the   screen      in   this   chapter   for   details     Press   and   hold   the   POWER   button   for   a   few   seconds     When   the   Phone   options   menu   appears    tap   Power off     Tap   OK   when   prompted   to   turn   off   the   phone     Setting up your phone for the first time  When   you   turn   on   your   phone   for   the   first   time    your   phone   displays     tutorials   and   guides   you   to   set   up   your   email   accounts   and   favorite     social   networks   such   as   Facebook      YouTube       and   Twitter       You   can     follow   the   onscreen   instructions   to   complete   the   setup    or   skip   the     setup   and   do   it   at   another   time 
265. umber   of   new   messages             To   open   the   message    press   and   hold   the   status   bar    and   then   slide     the   status   bar   down   to   open   the   Notifications   panel    Tap   the   new     message   to   open   and   read   it    For   information   on   reading   and   replying     to   messages   see      Managing   message   conversations      in   this   chapter     WAP push messages    WAP   push   messages   contain   a   web   link    Often    the   link   will   be   to     download   a   file   that   you   have   requested    for   example   a   ringtone     When   you   receive   a   WAP   push   message    a   notification   icon        is       displayed   in   the   status   bar     Opening the link contained in a WAP push message    Press   and   hold   the   status   bar    and   then   slide   the   status   bar   down     to   open   the   Notifications   panel     Tap   the   new   message     Tap   Visit website     Viewing all your WAP push messages    Press   HOME            and   then   tap         gt    Messages     Press   MENU    and   then   tap   Push messages     1     2     3     1     2     Messages    101    Managing message conversations    Text   and   multimedia   messages   that   are   sent   to   and   received   from   a     contact    or   a   number    are   grouped   into   conversations   or   message     threads   in   the   All   messages   screen    Threaded   text   or   multimedia     message
266. ur computer automatically  Do   the   following   first   to   make   sure   your   phone   will   sync   automatically     with   your   computer     Press   HOME            gt    MENU    and   then   tap   Settings  gt  Applications  gt     Development     Make   sure   the   USB debugging   check   box   is   selected     Whenever   you   connect   your   phone   to   your   computer    synchronization     starts   automatically    Wait   for   the   sync   process   to   finish     6     1     2     118    Accounts   and   sync    Synchronizing your phone with your computer manually    Connect   your   phone   to   the   computer   with   the   supplied   USB     cable    Or    if   your   phone   is   already   connected    press   and   hold   the     status   bar   and   drag   your   finger   down   to   open   the   Notifications     panel    Then   tap   the   status   that   shows      Select   to   change   USB     connection   type        On   the   Connect   to   PC   screen   in   your   phone     tap   HTC Sync   and     then   tap   Done     On   your   computer    check   and   make   sure   that   the   HTC   Sync   icon          at   the   bottom right   side   of   the   screen   appears   in   green   which       means   that   your   phone   is   connected   to   HTC   Sync        On   your   phone    tap   Sync now     Downloading the latest HTC Sync upgrade  Visit   the   HTC   support   website    www htc com support    from   time     to   time   to
267. ur phone 22        charging   the   battery    0      inserting   the   battery    9      inserting   the   storage   card    8      removing   the   battery    9      removing   the   storage   card    8      replacing   the   bottom   cover    7    YouTube 231  256    Z  Zooming  camera  212  Zooming in or out on a photo 225    
268. ut   how   to   copy   files      see      Copying   files   to   and   from   the   storage   card      in   the   Basics   chapter     Playing music    To   open   the   Music   application    press   HOME            tap      and   then   tap       Music     The   Music   application   opens   in   the   Playback   screen    Use   the   onscreen     controls   to   control   music   playback    select   a   song   to   play    repeat   songs      and   more    On   the   Playback   screen    you   can   also   swipe   your   finger   from     right   to   left   or   left   to   right   to   go   to   the   next   or   previous   music   album         Music      6    7    1  8    1     Tap   to   turn   shuffle   on   or   off     Shuffle   is   off   when   button   is   gray           Press   and   drag   your   finger   across   the   progress   bar   to   jump   to   any   part   of     the   song          Tap   to   go   to   the   Library          Tap   to   go   to   the   previous   song   in   the   Now   playing   list          Tap   to   play    pause    or   resume   playing   the   song     6     Tap   to   go   to   the   next   song   in   the   Now   playing   list     7     Tap   to   toggle   between   showing   the   Now   playing   list   and   Playback   screen     8     Tap   to   cycle   through   the   repeat   modes    Repeat   all   songs    Repeat   current     song    and   Don   t   repeat     When   playing   music   and   the   screen   turns 
269. vider   screen   is   displayed    tap   Other  POP3   IMAP      Enter   the   Email address   and   Password   for   the   email   account   and     then   tap   Next     If   the   account   type   you   want   to   set   up   is   not   in   the   phone     database    you   will   be   asked   to   enter   more   details        Enter   the   Account name and   Your name   and   then   tap   Finish  setup        1     2                   3     4     18    Email    Viewing your email inbox    Press   HOME           and   then   tap         gt    Mail        Tap   a   tab   at   the   bottom   of   the   screen   to   filter   the   inbox        1        1     Tap   to   view   a   different   email   account   or   add   a   new   email   account          Filter   tabs    See      Inbox   filter   tabs      for   details          Marked    Exchange   ActiveSync   only             Meeting   invitation    Exchange   ActiveSync   only          Number   of   unread   email   messages        1     2     Email    19    Inbox filter tabs    Received    Displays   email   messages   as   individual   items     Conversations    Displays   messages   as   conversations    grouped   according   to   the   subject     line    Tap   a   subject   in   the   list   to   show   the   email   conversation     VIP group    Displays   messages   from   contacts   in   your   VIP   group    To   add   contacts     to   the   VIP   group   from   this   tab    tap   Add contact to group    sel
270. w     check   box        Navigating on a web page  You   can   swipe   your   finger   on   the   screen   or   the   optical   trackball   to     navigate   and   view   other   areas   of   the   web   page     Zooming in or out on a web page  Tap   the   screen   twice   quickly   to   zoom   in    then   tap   the   screen   twice     quickly   again   to   zoom   out    You   can   also   use   your   fingers   to   pinch   or     spread   the   screen   to   zoom   in   and   out     Use   your   thumb   and   index   fingers   to      spread      the   web   page   to   zoom   in     1     2     19    Internet    Use   your   thumb   and   index   fingers   to      pinch      the   web   page   to   zoom   out     Selecting a link in a web page  You   can   tap   a   link   with   your   finger   to   open   it    or   press   and   hold   a   link     for   more   options     Link  What to do    Web page  address  URLs     Tap   the   link   to   open   the   web   page   Press   and   hold   the   link   to   open   a   menu   that   allows   you     to   open    bookmark    copy   to   the   clipboard    or   share   the     link   via   email                 Email address  Tap   to   send   an   email   message   to   the   email   address   Press   and   hold    then   tap   Copy   on   the   menu   to   copy   the     email   address   to   the   clipboard    You   can   paste   the   email     address   later   when   creating   a   new   contact   or   sending 
271. w   all   your   dialed   numbers   and   received   calls        Press   HOME            and   then   tap          Tap        at   the   bottom right   corner   of   the   screen        Do   one   of   the   following     Tap   the   name   or   number   in   the   list   to   call     Press   and   hold   a   name   or   number   in   the   list   to   display   the     options   menu   where   you   can   select   to   view   the   contact     information    if   the   number   is   stored   in   your   contacts   list     edit     the   number   before   you   redial    send   a   text   message    or   delete     from   call   history     Tap        to   show   the   call   history   for   that   particular   contact        1     2     3                          70    Phone   calls    You   can   also   access   call   history   from   the   People   application    See   the     People   chapter   for   more   information     Adding a new phone number to your contacts from call  history    Press   HOME               and   then   tap          Tap        at   the   bottom right   corner   of   the   screen        Press   and   hold   the   received   call   or   number   that   is   not   in   your     contacts   list   that   you   want   to   save   to   your   contacts   list    and   then     tap   Save to contacts     In   the   blank   contact   record   that   appears    enter   the   contact   name     and   other   information    The   phone   number   is   automa
272. wn   to   the   end   of   the     conversation     Tap   Reply  Reply to all    or   Forward     3  Do   one   of   the   following     If   you   selected   Reply   or   Reply to all    enter   your   reply   message     If   you   selected   Forward    specify   the   message   recipients     4  Tap   Send     Muting a conversation  If   you   re   part   of   a   long   message   conversation   that   isn   t   relevant    you   can        mute      the   conversation   to   keep   all   future   additions   out   of   your   Inbox     While   viewing   the   message   thread    press   MENU   and   then   tap   More    gt      Mute     1     2                   Email    11    Reporting a conversation as spam  The   Gmail Google   Mail   webmail   service   works   hard   to   prevent   spam      unwanted   and   unsolicited      junk      mail    from   reaching   your   Inbox    But     when   spam   makes   it   through    you   can   help   improve   the   service   by     reporting   the   conversation   as   spam     While   viewing   the   message   thread    press   MENU    and   then   tap   More    gt      Report spam     Sending a message    Press   HOME           and   then   tap         gt    Gmail Google Mail        In   the   Inbox    press   MENU   and   then   tap   Compose     Enter   the   message   recipient   s   email   address   in   the   To   field    If     you   are   sending   the   email   to   several   recipients    separate   the     email 
273. ws   only   status   updates   from   Facebook   and   Twitter             Shows   only   photo   updates   from   Facebook   and   Flickr        6     Shows   only   links   posted   on   Facebook        Updating your status    Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  Friend Stream     On   the   All Updates   tab    tap   the   text   field   with   the   words      What   s     on   your   mind         Tap            and   then   on   the   Update   Status   dialog   box    select   which       accounts   you   want   the   status   update   to   be   posted    Tap   Done     Only   the   accounts   that   you   are   signed   in   to   will   be   shown   on   the     dialog   box     Enter   your   status   update    and   then   tap   Share        Adding the Friend Stream widget  Add   the   Friend   Stream   widget   so   you   can   update   your   status     simultaneously   and   view   status   updates   from   your   social   network     accounts   right   on   the   Home   screen     Press   HOME            and   then   tap      gt  Widget  gt  Friend Stream     Choose   the   widget   style    and   then   tap   Select        Drag   the   widget   to   a   blank   space   on   the   Home   screen    and   then     release     1     2     3     4     1     2     3     Social    19    Chatting in Google Talk    Google Talk   is   Google   s   instant   messaging   program    It   lets   you     communicate   with   other   people   that   also   use   Goo
274. y     Tap   the        icon    and   then   select   the   phone   numbers   of   the       contacts   to   whom   you   want   to   send   the   message    You   can     also   select   contact   groups   as   recipients         When   you   have   selected   all   the   message   recipients    tap   Done     1     2     3                   96    Messages    Tap   the   text   box   that   contains   the   text      Tap   to   compose       and     then   start   composing   your   message     When   done    tap   Send   to   send   the   text   message        To   receive   delivery   reports   and   know   when   a   text   message   is   received      in   the   All   messages   screen    press   MENU   and   then   tap   Settings    In   the     SMS   settings   section    select   the   Delivery reports   check   box     Sending a multimedia  MMS  message    Press   HOME            and   then   tap         gt    Messages     On   the   All   messages   screen    tap   New message    The   Compose     screen   opens     Fill   in   one   or   more   recipients    You   can     Enter   phone   numbers   or   email   addresses   directly   in   the   To     field    If   you   re   sending   the   message   to   several   recipients      separate   the   phone   numbers   or   email   addresses   with   a   comma      As   you   enter   information    any   matching   phone   numbers   or     addresses   from   your   contacts   list   are   displayed    Tap   a   match   
275. your   own   name    and   then   tap   Edit privacy settings        Set   the   following   options   to   your   preferences        Detect your location    Let   Latitude   detect   and   update   your   location   as   you   move    The     update   frequency   is   determined   by   several   factors    such   as   how     recently   your   location   has   changed     Set your location    Choose   from   several   options   to   manually   select   your   location     Hide your location    Hide   your   location   from   all   your   friends     Turn off Latitude    Disable   Latitude   and   stop   sharing   your   location   or   status    You     can   always   join   Latitude   again     1     2     3         Maps   and   location    Using HTC Footprints    HTC Footprints      provides   an   easy   way   to   record   favorite   places   and     revisit   those   places    A   footprint   consists   of   a   photo   you   take   of   a     location   such   as   a   restaurant    a   sightseeing   destination    etc     stored     together   with   a   precise   GPS   position   and   other   information   about   that     location   such   as   the   street   address   and   phone   number     The   next   time   you   want   to   visit   the   same   place    simply   access   the     footprint    You   can   then   dial   the   phone   number   or   view   the   location   in     Google   Maps     Creating a footprint    Press   HOME            and   then   tap  
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
User`s Manual Date: 2013-02-07 Version: 1.0 Chengdu  s - Panorama.tv    Avaya 4625SW  jm140web [ 1270 Ko ] - Saint Rémy lès Chevreuse  User Manual POI-1501  Lucasey LCDC2  Brother BAS-411 User's Manual  Samsung 2043WM Kasutusjuhend  Gigabyte GA-7PESH2 motherboard    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file